SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL

Transcription

1 SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL GENERAL CONTRACTORS 835 GIL HARBIN INDUSTRIAL BLVD. VALDOSTA, GA (229) Fax (229) DATE July 2, 2010 JOB NO TO: BES Incorporated 2712 Bull Street Beaufort, SC P ATTENTION RE Mr. Robert Beach Enclave Force Protection Access Control Point Contract W9128F-09-C-0051 Ft. Gillem, Georgia Submittal Number Description SD-02a-1 Interior Distribution See Form 4025 Attached COPY TO File SIGNED If enclosures are not as noted, kindly notify us at once.

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29 Typical AD Panelboard Installation Consult instructions NEMA PB-1.1 located in the circuit directory on the front door before installing this panelboard. If necessary, order replacement manual from supplier. Wiring Guidelines (Cu or Al) Use 60 C or 75 C ampacity sized wire on line and neutral and equipment ground terminals. Standard wire sizes listed in this publication may be changed by using alternate terminal kits. Refer to circuit breakers for allowable wire temperature rating, wire size and tightening torque. Neutral rated for 200% panelboard phase current option. Use copper wire only at neutral main lugs - 125A (1) neutral cables 250 mcm maximum - 225A (2) neutral cables 250 mcm maximum - 400A (2) neutral cables 600 mcm maximum - 600A (4) neutral cables 350 mcm maximum Suitable for nonlinear loads, 200% rated neutral, additional Y lugs provided for 200% neutral. Short Circuit Current Rating The panelboard s maximum short circuit interrupting rating in rms symmetrical amperes, is equal to the lowest interrupting rating of any device installed, except as noted in the series rating listed in DEH-40007, with integral or remote main circuit breaker or fusible switch installed upstream of the panelboard. Devices to be installed or replacement units shall be from the same manufacturer, of the same type, and have equal or greater interrupting capacity. Maximum continuous loads on main or branch circuits shall not exceed 80% of the ratings of the listed circuit breakers. Branch breaker straps suitable for 200A maximum. Tripped Breaker If the breaker trips, handle will be in intermediate position. Instructions To Restore Power 1. Move handle to OFF position. 2. Then move handle to ON position. Seismic Rating Meets or Exceeds the Requirements According to IEEE High Level with 1.8 Amplication Factor IBC-2006 Sds = 1.3g, Ss = 200%, Ip = 1.5, for z/h > 0 Sds = 2.0g, Ss = 300%, Ip = 1.5, for z/h = 0 In accordance with ICC-ES-AC156 Polybag Contents A polybag of goods supplied with every panelboard interior contains: Arc flash label DEH Series Ratings, Wiring Diagrams & Circuit Directory Series rating sticker Front installation instructions ANSI PB1 documentation Circuit numbering stickers (1-84) Front and shield mounting screws imagination at work

30 Torque Tightening Torque Applies to line, neutral and equipment ground terminal Slotted Screw Internal Hex AWG Lbs-Ins Hex Lbs-Ins Wire Min Max Size Min Max / / / / / / Torque Values for Hardware Screw Size Torque (In-Lbs) #4 Steel 16 #10 Plastic 16 #8 Cu/Al/Steel 24 #10-32 Cu/Al/Steel 32 1/4-20 Al/<.150 Thick Cu 44 1/ Thick Cu 60 5/16-18 Cu/Al/Steel 110 3/8-16 Cu/Al/Steel 220 1/2-13 Cu/Al/Steel 220 Lug Kits Lug Kits for A-Series II Panelboards Pressure Lug Kit Crimp Lug Kit Pressure Lug Kit Rating Cat. No. Wire Range Al/Cu Cat. No. Wire Range Al/Cu Cat. No. Wire Range Cu Only 125A MLA MLT MLR A MLA2 1/0-250 MLT2 2/0-500 MLR2 1/ A Standard - MLA MLT (Cu Only) MLR41 1/0-600 Oversize MLA62 3/0-800 (Main) & (Neutral) A Standard -MLA MLR61 1/0-600 Crimp Tools Wire Crimp Tool All Al & Up to 500 MCM Cu Hubbell Anderson VC MCM Cu Hubbell Anderson VC7 Up to # MCM Cu & #5-750 Kcmil Al Burndy Tool Y644HS Neutral Lug Z Holes Wire Size Cu / Al Large 2 / 0-14 Small No Arc fault label included with all interiors to be applied by electrical contractor.

31 Interrupting Ratings - Molded Case Circuit Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers Federal Spec UL Listed Interrupting Ratings in ka Construction Frame Trip Range C/B Class RMS Symmetrical AC Volts Pole AC DC (Amps) W-C-375B Y/ TED V , TED , , TED E THED THED THED FBV , ,3 600Y/ Record Plus FBN , ,3 600Y/ FBH , ,3 600Y/ SEH (2) b, 15b a SEL b, 15b a, 22a, 23a SEP a a, 23a SFH b a, 22a SFL b a, 23a Spectra RMS a SFP a, 23a SGH4 (2) , a, 23a SGH6 (2) , a SGL , a SGP , a SGL , a SGP , a SKH , a, 23a SKL , a SKP , a (1) 3 Poles are not DC rated (2) Not current limiting breaker type Circuit Breaker Terminals (Cu-Al) Frame Wire Cu-Al (Unless otherwise specified) No. per Current Limiting / Poles Cat. No. Per Standard Pole Range High Interrupting Lug TED, THED 1 1 TCAL12 1 (30-60A) #14-3 Cu or #12-1 Al TED4 2,3 1 TCAL12A 1 (70-90A) #6-2/0 Cu or #4-2/0 Al TED6, THED 2,3 1 TCAL15 1 ( A) #3-3/0 1,2,3 1 FCAL12 1 (15-20A)#14-#12 Cu or # Al FBV, FBN, 1,2,3 1 FCAL13 1 (35-60A)#10-#6 Cu or #8-#4 Al FBH, FBL 1,2,3 1 FCAL14 1 (70-100A)#4-#1 Cu or #2-1/0 Al - SEH, SEL, SEP 2,3 1 TCAL18 1 #12-3/0 AL; #12-3/0 Cu SFHA SFLA, SFPA 2,3 1 TCAL129 1 #8-350kcmil SGHA SGL, SGP 2 1 TCLK265 (1) - 2 (2/0-400kcmil, Cu) or 2 (2/0-500kcmil, Al) or #6-600kcmil 3 1 TCLK365 (1) - 2 (2/0-400kcmil, Cu) or 2 (2/0-500kcmil, Al) or #6-600kcmil - FGN4, FGH4 2,3 1 FCALK318H - Top Hole #8-400kcmil Cu or #6-500kcmil Al. Bottom hole #2/0-600kcmil Cu & Al TCAL41 1 #4-600kcmil or 2(1/0-250kcmil) SKHA8 SKLA8, SKPA8 2,3 1 TCAL61 2 2/0-500kcmil TCAL81 3 3/0-500kcmil

32 Wiring Space Typical Panelboard Front view with trim removed Typical Front w/concealed Hinges and Trim Adjusting Screws Surface mounting add 1/4 to inside box dimensions Flush mounting add 1 1/2 to inside box dimensions Typical Box For 3/8 Bolt Box Width (Inside) Box Height (Inside) 3 Minimum Wiring Space, From End of Lug to Box Wall, in Inches Main Lugs Only, to Main Circuit Breaker End Wall Frame Phase Lug Main rating in amps Mounting Type To Side Wall Phase Lug Neutral Lug To End Wall (20" Wide box) Neutral Lug 125A MLO, 100A Main Breaker 6 6 TEY, SE Horizontal A TFJ, SF Vertical A (1) SF, SG, FG Vertical (1) 600A (1) SG Vertical A (2) (1) SK Vertical (1) To side wall (2) Box width is 30 and 7.81 deep Wiring Space Branch Circuit Breakers Minimum Wiring Spaces To Branch Circuit Devices Frame No. of Poles Side Wall (20" Wide Box) FB, TED, THED 1,2,3 3.7" Double Branched Bolt-on Devices SE 2,3 3.7" Enclosures Panel Size Box Front Cat. No. (1) Size Inches (2) Cat. No. (3) AB25B 25.5 AF25F,S AB31B 31.5 AF31F,S AB37B 37.5 AF37F,S AB43B 43.5 AF43F,S AB49B 49.5 AF49F,S AB55B 55.5 AF55F,S AB64B 64.5 AF64F,S AB76B 76.5 AF76F,S (1) B suffix provides blank end walls. Order K suffix for endwalls with knockouts. (2) Standard boxes are 20" wide by 5.81" deep. (3) Flush fronts are 1 1/2" larger than box. Surface fronts are 1/4" larger. Box Options Description Cat. No. Suffix (1) Painted Box P 30" wide (2) W NEMA 3R/12/4S/4X 3 or 4 NEMA 4X (316 Stainless Steel) 4S (1) Add to base box product number. (2) Includes field installable gutter barrier. Permanent Circuit Number Kits Description Cat. No APN APN APN126 Front Options Description Cat. No. Suffix (1) Screw cover C Front hinged to box D Yale 5116 w/rosette Lock Y Corbin Lock L GE 75 Key Lock E Corbin 60 Key Lock J Door within a door (2) P Stainless steel (3) S 30 wide W Nameplate N Screw on nameplate U Metal directory M Stainless Steel Enclosures Dimensions (inches) Cat No. H W D UL Standard CSA Labeled AB254S AB254AS AB254DWS AB254DWAS AB314S AB314AS AB314DWS AB314DWAS AB374S AB374AS AB374DWS AB374DWAS AB434S AB434AS AB434DWS AB434DWAS AB494S AB494AS AB494DWS AB494DWAS AB554S AB554AS AB554DWS AB554DWAS AB644S AB644AS AB644DWS AB644DWAS AB764S AB764AS AB764DWS AB764DWAS (1) Add to base front catalog number. (2) Consists of two lockable doors one over panel interior and one over box wiring gutters. Yale locks not available. (3) Flush only. Available with C and N options.

33 Accessories Field Installed Kits/Replacement Parts Filler Plates Breaker Type Cat. No. THQB/THHQB/THQL/THHQL/TEY TQLFP1 TQD/THQD/TED4/SE/FB TEDFP1 Breaker Mounting Hardware Kits For mounting breaker in existing space Breaker Type Cat. No. TED/THED4/SE ASPTED3P TQD/THQD ASPTQD3P FB ASPFB12P Equipment Grounds AEBGC AEIGC Item Description Wire Range Cat. No. #14-#8 Cu, #12-#8 Al Bonded (small holes); #14-#4 Cu, TGL2 #6-#4 Al (large holes) Metal Equipment Ground Aluminum Equipment Ground Copper Equipment Ground AEBG Extruded Bonded #14-#8 Cu, #12-#8 Al (small holes); #14-#4 Cu, #6-#4 Al (large holes) Extruded Bonded (1) #6-350MCM Extruded Isolated (2) #6-250MCM Main Lug Bonded AEIG #14-#8 Cu, #12-#8 Al (small holes); #14-#4 Cu, #6-#4 Al (large holes) #14-#8 Cu, #12-#8 Al (small holes); #14-#4 Cu, #6-#4 Al (large holes) Extruded Bonded (1) #4-350MCM Extruded Isolated (1) #6-250MCM Insulated Isolated 2/0 max. Bonding Kits Description For Split & Load End Neutral For 225A Horizontal Neutrals 225A Horizontal Neutral To Convert 3W to 4W 125/225A Horizontal Neutral Conversion from Service Entrance to Non-Service Entrance 125/225A Horizontal Neutral to Convert from Non-Service Entrance to Service Entrance. Installation & Maintenance Kit Order catalog number PROCARE. Kit includes: (5) filler plate hardware kits (9) bus stud nuts (5) MLA1 filler plates (2) 225A phase barriers (2) feed-thru barriers (1) 400/600A phase barrier (50) directory cards/rating books (50) circuit number strips (1-48) (50) circuit number strips (43-84) (5) standard locks & keys (50) deadfront screws (10) AQ/AE front hardware kits (10) AD front hardware kits (50) service disconnect labels (50) main labels Endwall Kits Field installed. 1 each, for standard 20"w x 5.81"d boxes. Type Cat. No. Blank ABEW2 Knockout ABEW2 EGS12 AEBG AEIG TGL2 TGC2 Cat. No. 343L886G16 343L886G13 ASP225HNCP ASPHNCPSENOT ASPHNCPSE ASPGIBC AEBGC AEIGC ASPGIBC Parts Description Cat. No. Directory Card 139C5612P3 Replacement Lock with Std. Key 569B737P1 Replacement Lock with GE75 Key 569B737P2 Additional Keys for Above Lock 569B737P5 Circuit Numbering Strips B806G1 Circuit Numbering Strips B806G2 Circuit Numbering Strips B806G3 Adhesive Backed Lamicoid Nameplate 3/4" x 3" 315A7190P1 Metal Directory Card Holder 139C5491G1 Directory Card Holder 139C5491P4 Delta Hi-leg Conversion Kit, to Add B-Phase Plug on AL Panels APHBL Bolt on AE/AQ Panels APHBQ NEMA 3R/12 Tamper Proof Tork Screw Kit NEMATRX 2P to 3P TQD Conv. Kit ASP2PTQD3P 2P to 3P SF Conv. Kit for horizontal subfeed ASP2PTFJ3P AD 25 to 65 kaic Barrier kit ASP25AD65KA1 Service Entrance Kit ASPSERENT 2 wire Relay Kit ASP2WRelay Yale Lock Kit ASPYALE47 Corbin Lock Kit ASPCORBNTEU1 2-3 pole TQD Mechanical Interlock TQDFM1 AQ/AL/AE Rail Bracket ASPAQLEBKT Front Flush Adjust Kit ASPFLUSHADJ AE Front Mounting Kit 139C5720G3 AQ/AL Front Mounting Kit 139C5720G6 AD Front Mounting Kit 139C5720G9 Front Hinge to Box Mounting Kit 139C5700G6 Front Extension Mounting Kit 139C5700G11 Box Extensions Bolts to box with or without endwall in place. Extensions can be combined to obtain lengths greater than 18 and 24 inches. Box Width and Depth 20 x x x 7.81 Box Extension Box Mounting Length (Inches) Cat. No. 9 ABX2509F Flush 18 ABX2518F 24 ABX2524F 9 ABX2509S 18 ABX2518S 24 ABX2524S 31 ABX2531S Surface 37 ABX2537S 43 ABX2543S 49 ABX2549S 55 ABX2555S 64 ABX2564S 76 ABX2576S Flush ABX3518F ABX3524F Surface ABX3518S ABX3524S Flush ABX3718F ABX3724F Surface 18 ABX3718S 24 ABX3724S Box Extension Covers Only 10 covers per kit Description Cat. No. 9" Covers Surface ASPABX09S 9" Covers Flush ASPABX09F 18" Covers Surface ASPABX18S 18" Covers Flush ASPABX18F 64" to 76" Covers Surface ASPABX20S 64" to 76" Covers Flush ASPABX20F

34 Specifications A-Series Panelboards and branch breakers meet or exceed the following standards and specifications: UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes UL 67 Panelboards UL 489 Circuit Breakers NEMA AB-1 Circuit Breakers NEMA PB-1 and PB-1.1 Panelboards US Federal Spec W-P.115B Panelboards US Federal Spec W-C375b Gen Circuit Breakers Boxes Galvanized steel Blank end walls are standard; knockouts are available when specified Boxes furnished with provisions for ground bus as standard Fronts Finished in ANSI-61 grey polyester powder coat paint. Equipped with corrosion-resistant Valox combination catch and lock door latch (doors over 48" high provided with 2 latches) Equipped with concealed hinges and trim adjusting screws Directory holder permanently mounted to door Panels Dead front construction Interiors are factory assembled on rigid steel frames Metal gages in accordance with UL and NEMA standards Solderless, anti-turn main lugs suitable for copper or aluminium wires are front removable and branch straps are silver-plated copper fully rated at 100 amperes Main bus is aluminum with copper branch connections unless otherwise specified Main disconnect device is identified when supplied, and numbers are provided for branch circuits Interior base assemblies are Noryl and provide breaker mounting and busbar insulation Publications E-DET-465 Certification of Seismic Compliance DE-44A Typical AD Panelboard Technical Information DEH Lighting Panels Rating Labels, Wiring Diagrams and Circuit Directory DEH 047 TED, THED, SED, SHE, SEL, SEP Circuit Breaker Mounting Instructions DEH 059 SGH, SFL, SFP Circuit Breaker Mounting Instructions DEH 060 SGH, SGL, SGP Circuit Breaker Mounting Instructions DEH 061 SKH, SKL, SKP Circuit Breaker Mounting Instructions DEH 065 TQD, THQD Circuit Breaker Mounting Instructions GE 41 Woodford Avenue, Plainville, CT General Electric Company imagination at work DE-44A REV 02 (6/08)

35 Typical ADP Panelboard 400/600/800A Installation Consult instructions NEMA PB-1 located in the circuit directory on the front door before installing this panelboard. If necessary, order replacement manual and PB-1.1 from supplier. Wiring Guidelines (Cu or Al) Use 60 C or 75 C ampacity sized wire on line and neutral and equipment ground terminals. Standard wire sizes listed in this publication may be changed by using alternate terminal kits. Refer to circuit breakers for allowable wire temperature rating, wire size and tightening torque. Short Circuit Current Rating The panelboard s maximum short circuit interrupting rating in rms symmetrical amperes, is equal to the lowest interrupting rating of any device installed, except as noted in the series rating listed in DEH-40007, with integral or remote main circuit breaker or fusible switch installed upstream of the panelboard. Devices to be installed or replacement units shall be from the same manufacturer, of the same type, and have equal or greater interrupting capacity. Maximum continuous loads on main or branch circuits shall not exceed 80% of the ratings of the listed circuit breakers. Branch breaker straps suitable for 300A maximum. Tripped Breaker If the breaker trips, handle will be in intermediate position. Instructions To Restore Power 1. Move handle to OFF position. 2. Then move handle to ON position. Seismic Rating Meets or Exceeds the Requirements According to IEEE High Level with 1.8 Amplication Factor IBC-2006 Sds = 1.3g, Ss = 200%, Ip = 1.5, for z/h > 0 Sds = 2.0g, Ss = 300%, Ip = 1.5, for z/h = 0 In accordance with ICC-ES-AC156 Polybag Contents A polybag of goods supplied with every panelboard interior contains: Arc flash label DEH Series Ratings, Wiring Diagrams & Circuit Directory Series rating sticker Front installation instructions ANSI PB1 documentation Circuit numbering stickers (1-84) Front and shield mounting screws imagination at work

36 Torque Tightening Torque Applies to line, neutral and equipment ground terminal Slotted Screw Internal Hex AWG Wire Lbs-Ins Min Max / Hex Lbs-Ins Size Min Max 3/ / / / / Arc fault label included with all interiors to be applied by electrical contractor. Torque Values for Hardware Screw Size Torque (In-Lbs) #4 Steel 16 #10 Plastic 16 #8 Cu/Al/Steel 24 #10-32 Cu/Al/Steel 32 1/4-20 Al/<.150 Thick Cu 44 1/ Thick Cu 60 5/16-18 Cu/Al/Steel 110 3/8-16 Cu/Al/Steel 220 1/2-13 Cu/Al/Steel Breaker Mounting Kits Application Type Cat. No. 3-poles SG ASPPSG3P Breaker-Defined Spaces (1) 3-poles SF ASPPSF3P 3-poles TED/THED/FB/SE ASPPTED3P SG Breaker ASPP6SG3S Unspecified and SF Breaker ASPP6SF3S Blank Spaces (2) SE/ED/FB (double branch) ASPP6SE6D (1) Includes items numbered 4, 5, 6 and 10 in exploded view. (2) Includes all numbered items in exploded view except Crimp Tools Wire Crimp Tool Up to # MCM Cu & #5-750 Kcmil Al Burndy Tool Y644HS 9 Neutral Wire Range (8) #2-600MCM (10) #6-250MCM (9) #140-2/0 (10) #8-#4 Cat. No. ANKN120

37 Interrupting Ratings - Molded Case Circuit Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers Federal Spec UL Listed Interrupting Ratings in ka Construction Frame Trip C/B Class RMS Symmetrical AC Volts / DC Volts Pole AC DC Range(Amps) W-C-375B Vdc 250Vdc TED b b E150 TED a N/A THED a THED a FBV , ,3 600Y/ Record Plus FBN , ,3 600Y/ FBH , ,3 600Y/ SEH (1) b, 15b a SEL b, 15b a, 22a, 23a SEP a a, 23a SFH b a, 22a SFL b a, 23a Spectra RMS a SFP a, 23a SGH4 (1) , a, 23a SGH6 (1) , a SGL , a SGP , a SGL , a SGP , a SKH , a, 23a SKL , a SKP , a (1) Not current limiting breaker type Circuit Breaker Terminals (Cu-Al) Frame Standard No. per Pole Wire Cu-Al (Unless otherwise specified) Per Lug Range Current Limiting / Poles Cat. No. High Interrupting TED, THED 1 1 TCAL12 1 (30-60A) #14-3 Cu or #12-1 Al TED4 2,3 1 TCAL12A 1 (70-90A) #6-2/0 Cu or #4-2/0 Al TED6, THED 2,3 1 TCAL15 1 ( A) #3-3/0 FCAL12 1 (15-20A)#14-#12 Cu or # Al FBV, FBN, 1,2,3 1 FCAL13 1 (35-60A)#10-#6 Cu or #8-#4 Al FBH, FBL FCAL14 1 (70-100A)#4-#1 Cu or #2-1/0 Al - SEH, SEL, SEP 2,3 1 TCAL18 1 #12-3/0 AL; #12-3/0 Cu SFHA SFLA, SFPA 2,3 1 TCAL129 1 #8-350kcmil SGHA SGL, SGP 2 1 TCLK265 (1) - 2 (2/0-400kcmil, Cu) or 2 (2/0-500kcmil, Al) or #6-600kcmil 3 1 TCLK365 (1) - 2 (2/0-400kcmil, Cu) or 2 (2/0-500kcmil, Al) or #6-600kcmil - FGN4, FGH4 2,3 1 FCALK318H - Al. Bottom hole #2/0-600kcmil Cu & Al Top Hole #8-400kcmil Cu or #6-500kcmil TCAL41 1 #4-600kcmil or 2(1/0-250kcmil) SKHA8 SKLA8, SKPA8 2,3 1 TCAL61 2 2/0-500kcmil TCAL81 3 3/0-500kcmil

38 Wiring Space Typical Panelboard Front view with trim removed Typical Front w/concealed Hinges and Trim Adjusting Screws Surface mounting add 1/4 to inside box dimensions Flush mounting add 1 1/2 to inside box dimensions Typical Box For 3/8 Bolt Box Width (Inside) Box Height (Inside) 3 Minimum Wiring Space, From End of Lug to Box Wall, in Inches Main rating in amps Main Lugs Only, to Main Circuit Breaker End Wall Frame Mounting Phase Lug Type Phase Lug Neutral Lug To End Wall 600A (1) (1) SG Vertical A (2) (1) SK Vertical 18 (1) Box width is 30 and 7.81 deep Wiring Space Branch Circuit Breakers Branch Circuit Devices Frame Minimum Wiring Spaces To No. of Poles Side Wall (30" Wide Box) Double Branched Bolt-on Devices FB, TED, THED 1,2,3 8.25" SE 2,3 8.25" Horizontal Single Branch Mounted SFHA, SFLA 2,3 7.5" Horizontal Single Branch Mounted SGHA, SGLA 2,3 8.5" Enclosures Panel Size Box Front Cat. No. (1) Size Inches (2) Cat. No. (3) AB25BDW 25.5 AF25F,S AB31BDW 31.5 AF31F,S AB37BDW 37.5 AF37F,S AB43BDW 43.5 AF43F,S AB49BDW 49.5 AF49F,S AB55BDW 55.5 AF55F,S AB64BDW 64.5 AF64F,S AB76BDW 76.5 AF76F,S AB82BDW 82.5 AF82F,S AB88BDW 88.5 AF88F,S (1) B suffix provides blank end walls. Order K suffix for endwalls with knockouts. (2) Standard boxes are 30" wide by 7.81" deep. (3) Flush fronts are 1 1/2" larger than box. Surface fronts are 1/4" larger. Box Options Description Cat. No. Suffix (1) Painted Box P 30" wide (2) W NEMA 3R/12/4S/4X 3 or 4 NEMA 4X (316 Stainless Steel) 4S (1) Add to base box product number. (2) Includes field installable gutter barrier. Permanent Circuit Number Kits Description Cat. No APN APN APN126 Front Options Description Cat. No. Suffix (1) Screw cover C Front hinged to box D Yale 5116 w/rosette Lock Y Corbin Lock L GE 75 Key Lock E Corbin 60 Key Lock J Door within a door (2) P Stainless steel (3) S 30 wide W Nameplate N Screw on nameplate U Metal directory M Stainless Steel Enclosures Dimensions (inches) Cat No. H W D UL Standard CSA Labeled AB254DWS AB254DWAS AB314DWS AB314DWAS AB374DWS AB374DWAS AB434DWS AB434DWAS AB494DWS AB494DWAS AB554DWS AB554DWAS AB644DWS AB644DWAS AB764DWS AB764DWAS (1) Add to base front catalog number. (2) Consists of two lockable doors one over panel interior and one over box wiring gutters. Yale locks not available. (3) Flush only. Available with C and N options.

39 Accessories Field Installed Kits/Replacement Parts Equipment Grounds Bonded Metal Equipment Ground Isolated Item Description Wire Range Cat. No. #14-#8 Cu, #12-#8 Al Bonded (small holes); #14-#4 Cu, TGL2 #6-#4 Al (large holes) Aluminum Equipment Ground Copper Equipment Ground AEBG AEBGC Extruded Bonded #14-#8 Cu, #12-#8 Al (small holes); #14-#4 Cu, #6-#4 Al (large holes) Extruded Bonded (1) #6-350MCM Extruded Isolated (2) #6-250MCM Main Lug Bonded ASPGIBC Isolated/Bonded #14-#8 Cu, #12-#8 Al (small holes); #14-#4 Cu, #6-#4 Al (large holes) #14-#8 Cu, #12-#8 Al (small holes); #14-#4 Cu, #6-#4 Al (large holes) Extruded Bonded (1) #4-350MCM Extruded Isolated (1) #6-250MCM Insulated Isolated 2/0 max. Installation & Maintenance Kit Order catalog number PROCARE. Kit includes: (5) filler plate hardware kits (9) bus stud nuts (5) MLA1 filler plates (2) 225A phase barriers (2) feed-thru barriers (1) 400/600A phase barrier (50) directory cards/rating books (50) circuit number strips (1-48) (50) circuit number strips (43-84) (5) standard locks & keys (50) deadfront screws (10) AQ/AE front hardware kits (10) AD front hardware kits (50) service disconnect labels (50) main labels EGS12 AEBG AEIG TGL2 TGC2 AEIG AEIGC AEBGC AEIGC ASPGIBC Parts Description Cat. No. Directory Card 139C5612P3 Replacement Lock with Std. Key 569B737P1 Replacement Lock with GE75 Key 569B737P2 Additional Keys for Above Lock 569B737P5 Circuit Numbering Strips B806G1 Circuit Numbering Strips B806G2 Circuit Numbering Strips B806G3 Adhesive Backed Lamicoid Nameplate 3/4" x 3" 315A7190P1 Metal Directory Card Holder 139C5491G1 Directory Card Holder 139C5491P4 Delta Hi-leg Conversion Kit, to Add B-Phase Plug on AL Panels APHBL Bolt on AE/AQ Panels APHBQ NEMA 3R/12 Tamper Proof Tork Screw Kit NEMATRX 2P to 3P TQD Conv. Kit ASP2PTQD3P 2P to 3P SF Conv. Kit for horizontal subfeed ASP2PTFJ3P AD 25 to 65 kaic Barrier kit ASP25AD65KA1 Service Entrance Kit ASPSERENT 2 wire Relay Kit ASP2WRelay Yale Lock Kit ASPYALE47 Corbin Lock Kit ASPCORBNTEU1 2-3 pole TQD Mechanical Interlock TQDFM1 AQ/AL/AE Rail Bracket ASPAQLEBKT Front Flush Adjust Kit ASPFLUSHADJ AE Front Mounting Kit 139C5720G3 AQ/AL Front Mounting Kit 139C5720G6 AD Front Mounting Kit 139C5728G9 Front Hinge to Box Mounting Kit 139C5700G6 Front Extension Mounting Kit 139C5700G11 Box Extensions Bolts to box with or without endwall in place. Extensions can be combined to obtain lengths greater than 18 and 24 inches. Box Width and Depth 30 x 7.81 Filler Plates Breaker Type TQD/THQD/TED4/SE/FB Box Extension Box Mounting Length (Inches) Cat. No. Flush 18 ABX3718F 24 ABX3724F Surface 18 ABX3718S 24 ABX3724S Cat. No. TEDFP1

40 Specifications A-Series Panelboards and branch breakers meet or exceed the following standards and specifications: UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes UL 67 Panelboards UL 489 Circuit Breakers NEMA AB-1 Circuit Breakers NEMA PB-1 and PB-1.1 Panelboards US Federal Spec W-P.115B Panelboards US Federal Spec W-C375b Gen Circuit Breakers Boxes Galvanized steel Blank end walls are standard Boxes furnished with provisions for ground bus as standard Fronts Finished in ANSI-61 grey polyester powder coat paint. Equipped with corrosion-resistant Valox combination catch and lock door latch (doors over 48" high provided with 2 latches) Equipped with concealed hinges and trim adjusting screws Directory holder permanently mounted to door Panels Dead front construction Interiors are factory assembled on rigid steel frames Metal gages in accordance with UL and NEMA standards Solderless, anti-turn main lugs suitable for copper or aluminium wires are front removable and branch straps are silver-plated copper fully rated at 100 amperes Main bus is aluminum with copper branch connections unless otherwise specified Main disconnect device is identified when supplied, and numbers are provided for branch circuits Interior base assemblies are Noryl and provide breaker mounting and busbar insulation Publications E-DET-465 Certification of Seismic Compliance DE-47A Typical ADP Panelboard Technical Information DEH Lighting Panels Rating Labels, Wiring Diagrams & Circuit Directory DEH TEY Three Phase Circuit Breaker Kits DEH TQD Three Phase Circuit Breaker Kits DEH SE/TED/FB Three Phase Circuit Breaker Kits DEH THQB Three Phase Circuit Breaker Kits DEH SF Three Phase Circuit Breaker Kits GE 41 Woodford Avenue, Plainville, CT General Electric Company imagination at work DE-47A REV 02 (6/08)

41 Typical AE Panelboard Installation Consult instructions NEMA PB-1.1 located in the circuit directory on the front door before installing this panelboard. If necessary, order replacement manual from supplier. Wiring Guidelines (Cu or Al) Use 60 C or 75 C ampacity sized wire on line and neutral and equipment ground terminals. Standard wire sizes listed in this publication may be changed by using alternate terminal kits. Refer to circuit breakers for allowable wire temperature rating, wire size and tightening torque. Neutral rated for 200% panelboard phase current option. Use copper wire only at neutral main lugs - 125A (1) neutral cables 250 mcm maximum - 225A (2) neutral cables 250 mcm maximum - 400A (2) neutral cables 600 mcm maximum - 600A (4) neutral cables 350 mcm maximum Suitable for nonlinear loads, 200% rated neutral, additional Y lugs provided for 200% neutral. Short Circuit Current Rating The panelboard s maximum short circuit interrupting rating in rms symmetrical amperes, is equal to the lowest interrupting rating of any device installed, except as noted in the series rating listed in DEH-40007, with integral or remote main circuit breaker or fusible switch installed upstream of the panelboard. Devices to be installed or replacement units shall be from the same manufacturer, of the same type, and have equal or greater interrupting capacity. Maximum continuous loads on main or branch circuits shall not exceed 80% of the ratings of the listed circuit breakers. Branch breaker straps suitable for 180A maximum. Tripped Breaker If the breaker trips, handle will be in intermediate position. Instructions To Restore Power 1. Move handle to OFF position. 2. Then move handle to ON position. Seismic Rating Meets or Exceeds the Requirements According to IEEE High Level with 1.8 Amplication Factor IBC-2006 Sds = 1.3g, Ss = 200%, Ip = 1.5, for z/h > 0 Sds = 2.0g, Ss = 300%, Ip = 1.5, for z/h = 0 In accordance with ICC-ES-AC156 Polybag Contents A polybag of goods supplied with every panelboard interior contains: Arc flash label DEH Series Ratings, Wiring Diagrams & Circuit Directory Series rating sticker Front installation instructions ANSI PB1 documentation Circuit numbering stickers (1-84) Front and shield mounting screws imagination at work

42 Torque Tightening Torque Applies to line, neutral and equipment ground terminal Slotted Screw AWG Wire Lbs-Ins Min Max / Internal Hex Hex Lbs-Ins Size Min Max 3/ / / / / Torque Values for Hardware Screw Size Torque (In-Lbs) #4 Steel 16 #10 Plastic 16 #8 Cu/Al/Steel 24 #10-32 Cu/Al/Steel 32 1/4-20 Al/<.150 Thick Cu 44 1/ Thick Cu 60 5/16-18 Cu/Al/Steel 110 3/8-16 Cu/Al/Steel 220 1/2-13 Cu/Al/Steel 220 Lug Kits Lug Kits for A-Series II Panelboards Pressure Lug Kit Crimp Lug Kit Pressure Lug Kit Rating Cat. No. Wire Range Al/Cu Cat. No. Wire Range Al/Cu Cat. No. Wire Range Cu Only 125A MLA MLT MLR A MLA2 1/0-250 MLT2 2/0-500 MLR2 1/ A Standard - MLA MLT (Cu Only) MLR41 1/0-600 Oversize MLA62 3/0-800 (Main) & (Neutral) A Standard -MLA MLR61 1/0-600 Crimp Tools Wire Crimp Tool All Al & Up to 500 MCM Cu Hubbell Anderson VC MCM Cu Hubbell Anderson VC7 Up to # MCM Cu & #5-750 Kcmil Al Burndy Tool Y644HS Neutral Lug Z Holes Wire Size Cu / Al Large 2 / 0-14 Small No Arc fault label included with all interiors to be applied by electrical contractor.

43 Interrupting Ratings - Molded Case Circuit Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers Federal Spec UL Listed Interrupting Ratings in ka Construction Frame Trip Range C/B Class RMS Symmetrical AC Volts Pole AC DC (Amps) W-C-375B / Y/ Y/ a Standard TEY ,3 480Y/ a 65 Frames TJD , (1) 14b SEH (2) b, 15b a SEL b, 15b a, 22a, 23a SEP a a, 23a SFH b a, 22a SFL b Spectra RMS (1) 3 Poles are not DC rated (2) Not current limiting breaker type SFP a, 23a a a, 23a SGH4 (2) , a, 23a SGH6 (2) , a SGL , a SGP , a SGL , a SGP , a SKH , a, 23a SKL , a SKP , a Circuit Breaker Terminals (Cu-Al) Frame Wire Cu-Al (Unless otherwise specified) No. per Current Limiting / Poles Cat. No. Per Standard Pole High Interrupting Lug Range TEY - 1,2,3 1 Fixed to Breaker Terminal 1 (15-20A) #14-#12 Cu or #12-1 Al, (30-60A) #10-#6 Cu or #8-#4 Al, (70-100A) #4-#1 Cu or#2-1/0 Al - SEH, SEL, SEP 2,3 1 TCAL18 1 #12-3/0 Al; #12-3/0 Cu SFHA SFLA, SFPA 2,3 1 TCAL129 1 #8-350kcmil TFJ - 2,3 1 TCAL24,26 1 #4-300MCM TJJ - 2,3 1 TCAL43 1 #6-600MCM or 2(2/0-250MCM) SGHA SGL, SGP 2 1 TCLK TCLK FGN4, FGH4 2,3 1 FCALK318H - SKHA8 SKLA8, SKPA8 2,3 1 2 (2/0-400kcmil, Cu) or 2 (2/0-500kcmil, Al) or #6-600kcmil 2 (2/0-400kcmil, Cu) or 2 (2/0-500kcmil, Al) or #6-600kcmil Top Hole #8-400kcmil Cu or #6-500kcmil Al. Bottom hole #2/0-600kcmil Cu & Al TCAL41 1 #4-600kcmil or 2(1/0-250kcmil) TCAL61 2 2/0-500kcmil TCAL81 3 3/0-500kcmil

44 Wiring Space Typical Panelboard Front view with trim removed Typical Front w/concealed Hinges and Trim Adjusting Screws Surface mounting add 1/4 to inside box dimensions Flush mounting add 1 1/2 to inside box dimensions Typical Box For 3/8 Bolt Box Width (Inside) Box Height (Inside) 3 Minimum Wiring Space, From End of Lug to Box Wall, in Inches Main Lugs Only, to End Main Circuit Breaker Wall Frame Phase Lug Main rating in amps Mounting Type To Side Wall Phase Lug Neutral Lug To End Wall (20" Wide box) Neutral Lug 125A MLO, 100A Main Breaker 6 6 TEY, SE Horizontal A TFJ, SF Vertical A (1) SF, SG, FG Vertical (1) 600A (1) SG Vertical A (2) (1) SK Vertical (1) To side wall (2) Box width is 30 and 7.81 deep Wiring Space Branch Circuit Breakers Branch Circuit Devices Frame No. of Minimum Wiring Spaces Poles To Side Wall (20" Wide Box) Double Branched Bolt-on Devices TEY 1,2,3 6.5" Horizontal Subfeeds, Single Branch Mounted, Maximum 6 Poles TED4 2,3 5.5" Horizontal Subfeeds, Single Branch Mounted, Maximum 3 Poles SEHA, SELA 2,3 Horizontal Subfeeds, Single Branch Mounted, Maximum 6 Poles SFHA, SFLA 2,3 5.5" Enclosures Panel Size Box Front Cat. No. (1) Size Inches (2) Cat. No. (3) AB25B 25.5 AF25F,S AB31B 31.5 AF31F,S AB37B 37.5 AF37F,S AB43B 43.5 AF43F,S AB49B 49.5 AF49F,S AB55B 55.5 AF55F,S AB64B 64.5 AF64F,S AB76B 76.5 AF76F,S (1) B suffix provides blank end walls. Order K suffix for endwalls with knockouts. (2) Standard boxes are 20" wide by 5.81" deep. (3) Flush fronts are 1 1/2" larger than box. Surface fronts are 1/4" larger. Box Options Description Cat. No. Suffix (1) Painted Box P 30" wide (2) W NEMA 3R/12/4S/4X 3 or 4 NEMA 4X (316 Stainless Steel) 4S (1) Add to base box product number. (2) Includes field installable gutter barrier. Permanent Circuit Number Kits Description Cat. No APN APN APN126 Front Options Description Cat. No. Suffix (1) Screw cover C Front hinged to box D Yale 5116 w/rosette Lock Y Corbin Lock L GE 75 Key Lock E Corbin 60 Key Lock J Door within a door (2) P Stainless steel (3) S 30 wide W Nameplate N Screw on nameplate U Metal directory M Stainless Steel Enclosures Dimensions (inches) Cat No. H W D UL Standard CSA Labeled AB254S AB254AS AB254DWS AB254DWAS AB314S AB314AS AB314DWS AB314DWAS AB374S AB374AS AB374DWS AB374DWAS AB434S AB434AS AB434DWS AB434DWAS AB494S AB494AS AB494DWS AB494DWAS AB554S AB554AS AB554DWS AB554DWAS AB644S AB644AS AB644DWS AB644DWAS AB764S AB764AS AB764DWS AB764DWAS (1) Add to base front catalog number. (2) Consists of two lockable doors one over panel interior and one over box wiring gutters. Yale locks not available. (3) Flush only. Available with C and N options.

45 Accessories Field Installed Kits/Replacement Parts Filler Plates Breaker Type Cat. No. THQB/THHQB/THQL/THHQL/TEY TQLFP1 TQD/THQD/TED4/SE/FB TEDFP1 Breaker Mounting Hardware Kits For mounting breaker in existing space Breaker Type Cat. No. TED/THED4/SE ASPTED3P TQD/THQD ASPTQD3P FB ASPFB12P Equipment Grounds AEBGC AEIGC Item Description Wire Range Cat. No. #14-#8 Cu, #12-#8 Al Bonded (small holes); #14-#4 Cu, TGL2 #6-#4 Al (large holes) Metal Equipment Ground Aluminum Equipment Ground Copper Equipment Ground AEBG Extruded Bonded #14-#8 Cu, #12-#8 Al (small holes); #14-#4 Cu, #6-#4 Al (large holes) Extruded Bonded (1) #6-350MCM Extruded Isolated (2) #6-250MCM Main Lug Bonded AEIG #14-#8 Cu, #12-#8 Al (small holes); #14-#4 Cu, #6-#4 Al (large holes) #14-#8 Cu, #12-#8 Al (small holes); #14-#4 Cu, #6-#4 Al (large holes) Extruded Bonded (1) #4-350MCM Extruded Isolated (1) #6-250MCM Insulated Isolated 2/0 max. Bonding Kits Description For Split & Load End Neutral For 225A Horizontal Neutrals 225A Horizontal Neutral To Convert 3W to 4W 125/225A Horizontal Neutral Conversion from Service Entrance to Non-Service Entrance 125/225A Horizontal Neutral to Convert from Non-Service Entrance to Service Entrance. Installation & Maintenance Kit Order catalog number PROCARE. Kit includes: (5) filler plate hardware kits (9) bus stud nuts (5) MLA1 filler plates (2) 225A phase barriers (2) feed-thru barriers (1) 400/600A phase barrier (50) directory cards/rating books (50) circuit number strips (1-48) (50) circuit number strips (43-84) (5) standard locks & keys (50) deadfront screws (10) AQ/AE front hardware kits (10) AD front hardware kits (50) service disconnect labels (50) main labels Endwall Kits Field installed. 1 each, for standard 20"w x 5.81"d boxes. Type Cat. No. Blank ABEW2 Knockout ABEW2 EGS12 AEBG AEIG TGL2 TGC2 Cat. No. 343L886G16 343L886G13 ASP225HNCP ASPHNCPSENOT ASPHNCPSE ASPGIBC AEBGC AEIGC ASPGIBC Parts Description Cat. No. Directory Card 139C5612P3 Replacement Lock with Std. Key 569B737P1 Replacement Lock with GE75 Key 569B737P2 Additional Keys for Above Lock 569B737P5 Circuit Numbering Strips B806G1 Circuit Numbering Strips B806G2 Circuit Numbering Strips B806G3 Adhesive Backed Lamicoid Nameplate 3/4" x 3" 315A7190P1 Metal Directory Card Holder 139C5491G1 Directory Card Holder 139C5491P4 Delta Hi-leg Conversion Kit, to Add B-Phase Plug on AL Panels APHBL Bolt on AE/AQ Panels APHBQ NEMA 3R/12 Tamper Proof Tork Screw Kit NEMATRX 2P to 3P TQD Conv. Kit ASP2PTQD3P 2P to 3P SF Conv. Kit for horizontal subfeed ASP2PTFJ3P AD 25 to 65 kaic Barrier kit ASP25AD65KA1 Service Entrance Kit ASPSERENT 2 wire Relay Kit ASP2WRelay Yale Lock Kit ASPYALE47 Corbin Lock Kit ASPCORBNTEU1 2-3 pole TQD Mechanical Interlock TQDFM1 AQ/AL/AE Rail Bracket ASPAQLEBKT Front Flush Adjust Kit ASPFLUSHADJ AE Front Mounting Kit 139C5720G3 AQ/AL Front Mounting Kit 139C5720G6 AD Front Mounting Kit 139C5728G9 Front Hinge to Box Mounting Kit 139C5700G6 Front Extension Mounting Kit 139C5700G11 Box Extensions Bolts to box with or without endwall in place. Extensions can be combined to obtain lengths greater than 18 and 24 inches. Box Width and Depth 20 x x x 7.81 Box Extension Box Mounting Length (Inches) Cat. No. 9 ABX2509F Flush 18 ABX2518F 24 ABX2524F 9 ABX2509S 18 ABX2518S 24 ABX2524S 31 ABX2531S Surface 37 ABX2537S 43 ABX2543S 49 ABX2549S 55 ABX2555S 64 ABX2564S 76 ABX2576S Flush ABX3518F ABX3524F Surface ABX3518S ABX3524S Flush ABX3718F ABX3724F Surface 18 ABX3718S 24 ABX3724S Box Extension Covers Only 10 covers per kit Description Cat. No. 9" Covers Surface ASPABX09S 9" Covers Flush ASPABX09F 18" Covers Surface ASPABX18S 18" Covers Flush ASPABX18F 64" to 76" Covers Surface ASPABX20S 64" to 76" Covers Flush ASPABX20F

46 Specifications A-Series Panelboards and branch breakers meet or exceed the following standards and specifications: UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes UL 67 Panelboards UL 489 Circuit Breakers NEMA AB-1 Circuit Breakers NEMA PB-1 and PB-1.1 Panelboards US Federal Spec W-P.115B Panelboards US Federal Spec W-C375b Gen Circuit Breakers Boxes Galvanized steel Blank end walls are standard; knockouts are available when specified Boxes furnished with provisions for ground bus as standard Fronts Finished in ANSI-61 grey polyester powder coat paint. Equipped with corrosion-resistant Valox combination catch and lock door latch (doors over 48" high provided with 2 latches) Equipped with concealed hinges and trim adjusting screws Directory holder permanently mounted to door Panels Dead front construction Interiors are factory assembled on rigid steel frames Metal gages in accordance with UL and NEMA standards Solderless, anti-turn main lugs suitable for copper or aluminium wires are front removable and branch straps are silver-plated copper fully rated at 100 amperes Main bus is aluminum with copper branch connections unless otherwise specified Main disconnect device is identified when supplied, and numbers are provided for branch circuits Interior base assemblies are Noryl and provide breaker mounting and busbar insulation Publications E-DET-465 Certification of Seismic Compliance DE-43A Typical AE Panelboard Technical Information DEH Lighting Panels Rating Labels, Wiring Diagrams and Circuit Directory DEH 047 TED, THED, SED, SHE, SEL, SEP Circuit Breaker Mounting Instructions DEH 059 SGH, SFL, SFP Circuit Breaker Mounting Instructions DEH 060 SGH, SGL, SGP Circuit Breaker Mounting Instructions DEH 061 SKH, SKL, SKP Circuit Breaker Mounting Instructions DEH 065 TQD, THQD Circuit Breaker Mounting Instructions GE 41 Woodford Avenue, Plainville, CT General Electric Company imagination at work DE-43A REV 02 (6/08)

47 Typical AQ/AL Panelboard Installation Consult instructions NEMA PB-1.1 located in the circuit directory on the front door before installing this panelboard. If necessary, order replacement manual from supplier. Wiring Guidelines (Cu or Al) Use 60 C or 75 C ampacity sized wire on line and neutral and equipment ground terminals. Standard wire sizes listed in this publication may be changed by using alternate terminal kits. Refer to circuit breakers for allowable wire temperature rating, wire size and tightening torque. Neutral rated for 200% panelboard phase current option. Use copper wire only at neutral main lugs - 125A (1) neutral cables 250 mcm maximum - 225A (2) neutral cables 250 mcm maximum - 400A (2) neutral cables 600 mcm maximum - 600A (4) neutral cables 350 mcm maximum Suitable for nonlinear loads, 200% rated neutral, additional Y lugs provided for 200% neutral. Short Circuit Current Rating The panelboard s maximum short circuit interrupting rating in rms symmetrical amperes, is equal to the lowest interrupting rating of any device installed, except as noted in the series rating listed in DEH-40007, with integral or remote main circuit breaker or fusible switch installed upstream of the panelboard. Devices to be installed or replacement units shall be from the same manufacturer, of the same type, and have equal or greater interrupting capacity. Maximum continuous loads on main or branch circuits shall not exceed 80% of the ratings of the listed circuit breakers. Branch breaker straps suitable for 180A maximum. Tripped Breaker If the breaker trips, handle will be in intermediate position. Instructions To Restore Power 1. Move handle to OFF position. 2. Then move handle to ON position. Seismic Rating Meets or Exceeds the Requirements According to IEEE High Level with 1.8 Amplication Factor IBC-2006 Sds = 1.3g, Ss = 200%, Ip = 1.5, for z/h > 0 Sds = 2.0g, Ss = 300%, Ip = 1.5, for z/h = 0 In accordance with ICC-ES-AC156 Polybag Contents A polybag of goods supplied with every panelboard interior contains: Arc flash label DEH Series Ratings, Wiring Diagrams & Circuit Directory Series rating sticker Front installation instructions ANSI PB1 documentation Circuit numbering stickers (1-84) Front and shield mounting screws imagination at work

48 Torque Tightening Torque Applies to line, neutral and equipment ground terminal Slotted Screw AWG Wire Lug Kits Lbs-Ins Min Max / Internal Hex Hex Lbs-Ins Size Min Max 3/ / / / / Torque Values for Hardware Screw Size Torque (In-Lbs) #4 Steel 16 #10 Plastic 16 #8 Cu/Al/Steel 24 #10-32 Cu/Al/Steel 32 1/4-20 Al/<.150 Thick Cu 44 1/ Thick Cu 60 5/16-18 Cu/Al/Steel 110 3/8-16 Cu/Al/Steel 220 1/2-13 Cu/Al/Steel 220 Lug Kits for A-Series II Panelboards Pressure Lug Kit Crimp Lug Kit Pressure Lug Kit Rating Cat. No. Wire Range Al/Cu Cat. No. Wire Range Al/Cu Cat. No. Wire Range Cu Only 125A MLA MLT MLR A MLA2 1/0-250 MLT2 2/0-500 MLR2 1/ A Standard - MLA MLT (Cu Only) MLR41 1/0-600 Oversize MLA62 3/0-800 (Main) & (Neutral) A Standard -MLA MLR61 1/0-600 Crimp Tools Wire Crimp Tool All Al & Up to 500 MCM Cu Hubbell Anderson VC MCM Cu Hubbell Anderson VC7 Up to # MCM Cu & #5-750 Kcmil Al Burndy Tool Y644HS Neutral Lug Z Holes Wire Size Cu / Al Large 2 / 0-14 Small No Arc fault label included with all interiors to be applied by electrical contractor.

49 Interrupting Ratings - Molded Case Circuit Breakers Molded Case Circuit Breakers Federal Spec UL Listed Interrupting Ratings in ka Construction Frame Trip Range C/B Class RMS Symmetrical AC Volts Pole AC DC (Amps) W-C-375B / Y/ THQB /240 12a THQL /240 12a , a 10 HQ Frame THQL-GF ,2 120/ THQL-HID ,2 120/ THQB-GF ,2 120/ THQB-HID ,2 120/ TXQB ,2 120/ HHQ Frame (1) 3 Poles are not DC rated (2) Not current limiting breaker type THHQB /240 14a /240 14a 22 THHQL b b 22 THHQL-GF / THHQL-HID ,2 120/ THHQB-GF / THHQB-HID ,2 120/ Standard TQD , b 10 Frames TJD , (1) 14b 22 Hi-Break Frames THQD ,3 N/A 22 SEH (2) b, 15b a SEL b, 15b a, 22a, 23a SEP a a, 23a SFH b a, 22a SFL b a, 23a Spectra RMS a SFP a, 23a SGH4 (2) , a, 23a SGH6 (2) , a SGL , a SGP , a SGL , a SGP , a SKH , a, 23a SKL , a SKP , a Circuit Breaker Terminals (Cu-Al) Frame Wire Cu-Al (Unless otherwise specified) No. per Current Limiting / Poles Cat. No. Per Standard Pole High Interrupting Lug Range THQB, TXQB, THHQB, (15-30A) #14-4 Cu or #12-4 Al, (35-100A) - 1,2,3 1 Fixed to Breaker Terminal 1 THQL, THHQL, TXQL #14-10 Cu or #12-1/0 Al - SEH, SEL, SEP 2,3 1 TCAL18 1 #12-3/0 Al; #12-3/0 Cu SFHA SFLA, SFPA 2,3 1 TCAL129 1 #8-350kcmil SGHA SGL, SGP 2 1 TCLK265-2 (2/0-400kcmil, Cu) or 2 (2/0-500kcmil, Al) or #6-600kcmil 3 1 TCLK365-2 (2/0-400kcmil, Cu) or 2 (2/0-500kcmil, Al) or #6-600kcmil - FGN4, FGH4 2,3 1 FCALK318H - Al. Bottom hole #2/0-600kcmil Cu & Al Top Hole #8-400kcmil Cu or #6-500kcmil TCAL41 1 #4-600kcmil or 2(1/0-250kcmil) SKHA8 SKLA8, SKPA8 2,3 1 TCAL61 2 2/0-500kcmil TCAL81 3 3/0-500kcmil

50 Wiring Space Typical Panelboard Front view with trim removed Typical Front w/concealed Hinges and Trim Adjusting Screws Surface mounting add 1/4 to inside box dimensions Flush mounting add 1 1/2 to inside box dimensions Typical Box For 3/8 Bolt Box Width (Inside) Box Height (Inside) 3 Minimum Wiring Space, From End of Lug to Box Wall, in Inches Main Lugs Only, to Main Circuit Breaker End Wall Frame Phase Lug Neutral Lug Main rating in amps Mounting Type To Side Wall Phase Lug Neutral Lug To End Wall (20" Wide box) 125A MLO, 100A Main Breaker 6 6 TEY, SE Horizontal A TFJ, SF Vertical A (1) SF, SG, FG Vertical (1) 600A (1) SG Vertical A (2) (1) SK Vertical (1) To side wall (2) Box width is 30 and 7.81 deep Wiring Space Branch Circuit Breakers Branch Circuit Devices Frame Minimum Wiring Spaces To No. of Poles Side Wall (20" Wide Box) Double Branched Bolt-on Devices THQL, THHQL, THQB, THHQB 1,2,3 6.5" Horizontal Subfeeds Single Branch Mounted TQD, THQD 2,3 5.5" Enclosures Panel Size Box Front Cat. No. (1) Size Inches (2) Cat. No. (3) AB25B 25.5 AF25F,S AB31B 31.5 AF31F,S AB37B 37.5 AF37F,S AB43B 43.5 AF43F,S AB49B 49.5 AF49F,S AB55B 55.5 AF55F,S AB64B 64.5 AF64F,S AB76B 76.5 AF76F,S (1) B suffix provides blank end walls. Order K suffix for endwalls with knockouts. (2) Standard boxes are 20" wide by 5.81" deep. (3) Flush fronts are 1 1/2" larger than box. Surface fronts are 1/4" larger. Box Options Description Cat. No. Suffix (1) Painted Box P 30" wide (2) W NEMA 3R/12/4S/4X 3 or 4 NEMA 4X (316 Stainless Steel) 4S (1) Add to base box product number. (2) Includes field installable gutter barrier. Permanent Circuit Number Kits Description Cat. No APN APN APN126 Front Options Description Cat. No. Suffix (1) Screw cover C Front hinged to box D Yale 5116 w/rosette Lock Y Corbin Lock L GE 75 Key Lock E Corbin 60 Key Lock J Door within a door (2) P Stainless steel (3) S 30 wide W Nameplate N Screw on nameplate U Metal directory M Stainless Steel Enclosures Dimensions (inches) Cat No. H W D UL Standard CSA Labeled AB254S AB254AS AB254DWS AB254DWAS AB314S AB314AS AB314DWS AB314DWAS AB374S AB374AS AB374DWS AB374DWAS AB434S AB434AS AB434DWS AB434DWAS AB494S AB494AS AB494DWS AB494DWAS AB554S AB554AS AB554DWS AB554DWAS AB644S AB644AS AB644DWS AB644DWAS AB764S AB764AS AB764DWS AB764DWAS (1) Add to base front catalog number. (2) Consists of two lockable doors one over panel interior and one over box wiring gutters. Yale locks not available. (3) Flush only. Available with C and N options.

51 Accessories Field Installed Kits/Replacement Parts Filler Plates Breaker Type Cat. No. THQB/THHQB/THQL/THHQL/TEY TQLFP1 TQD/THQD/TED4/SE/FB TEDFP1 Breaker Mounting Hardware Kits For mounting breaker in existing space Breaker Type Cat. No. TED/THED4/SE ASPTED3P TQD/THQD ASPTQD3P FB ASPFB12P Equipment Grounds AEBGC AEIGC Item Description Wire Range Cat. No. #14-#8 Cu, #12-#8 Al Bonded (small holes); #14-#4 Cu, TGL2 #6-#4 Al (large holes) Metal Equipment Ground Aluminum Equipment Ground Copper Equipment Ground AEBG Extruded Bonded #14-#8 Cu, #12-#8 Al (small holes); #14-#4 Cu, #6-#4 Al (large holes) Extruded Bonded (1) #6-350MCM Extruded Isolated (2) #6-250MCM Main Lug Bonded AEIG #14-#8 Cu, #12-#8 Al (small holes); #14-#4 Cu, #6-#4 Al (large holes) #14-#8 Cu, #12-#8 Al (small holes); #14-#4 Cu, #6-#4 Al (large holes) Extruded Bonded (1) #4-350MCM Extruded Isolated (1) #6-250MCM Insulated Isolated 2/0 max. Bonding Kits Description For Split & Load End Neutral For 225A Horizontal Neutrals 225A Horizontal Neutral To Convert 3W to 4W 125/225A Horizontal Neutral Conversion from Service Entrance to Non-Service Entrance 125/225A Horizontal Neutral to Convert from Non-Service Entrance to Service Entrance. Installation & Maintenance Kit Order catalog number PROCARE. Kit includes: (5) filler plate hardware kits (9) bus stud nuts (5) MLA1 filler plates (2) 225A phase barriers (2) feed-thru barriers (1) 400/600A phase barrier (50) directory cards/rating books (50) circuit number strips (1-48) (50) circuit number strips (43-84) (5) standard locks & keys (50) deadfront screws (10) AQ/AE front hardware kits (10) AD front hardware kits (50) service disconnect labels (50) main labels Endwall Kits Field installed. 1 each, for standard 20"w x 5.81"d boxes. Type Cat. No. Blank ABEW2 Knockout ABEW2 EGS12 AEBG AEIG TGL2 TGC2 Cat. No. 343L886G16 343L886G13 ASP225HNCP ASPHNCPSENOT ASPHNCPSE ASPGIBC AEBGC AEIGC ASPGIBC Parts Description Cat. No. Directory Card 139C5612P3 Replacement Lock with Std. Key 569B737P1 Replacement Lock with GE75 Key 569B737P2 Additional Keys for Above Lock 569B737P5 Circuit Numbering Strips B806G1 Circuit Numbering Strips B806G2 Circuit Numbering Strips B806G3 Adhesive Backed Lamicoid Nameplate 3/4" x 3" 315A7190P1 Metal Directory Card Holder 139C5491G1 Directory Card Holder 139C5491P4 Delta Hi-leg Conversion Kit, to Add B-Phase Plug on AL Panels APHBL Bolt on AE/AQ Panels APHBQ NEMA 3R/12 Tamper Proof Tork Screw Kit NEMATRX 2P to 3P TQD Conv. Kit ASP2PTQD3P 2P to 3P SF Conv. Kit for horizontal subfeed ASP2PTFJ3P AD 25 to 65 kaic Barrier kit ASP25AD65KA1 Service Entrance Kit ASPSERENT 2 wire Relay Kit ASP2WRelay Yale Lock Kit ASPYALE47 Corbin Lock Kit ASPCORBNTEU1 2-3 pole TQD Mechanical Interlock TQDFM1 AQ/AL/AE Rail Bracket ASPAQLEBKT Front Flush Adjust Kit ASPFLUSHADJ AE Front Mounting Kit 139C5720G3 AQ/AL Front Mounting Kit 139C5720G6 AD Front Mounting Kit 139C5728G9 Front Hinge to Box Mounting Kit 139C5700G6 Front Extension Mounting Kit 139C5700G11 Box Extensions Bolts to box with or without endwall in place. Extensions can be combined to obtain lengths greater than 18 and 24 inches. Box Width and Depth 20 x x x 7.81 Box Extension Box Mounting Length (Inches) Cat. No. 9 ABX2509F Flush 18 ABX2518F 24 ABX2524F 9 ABX2509S 18 ABX2518S 24 ABX2524S 31 ABX2531S Surface 37 ABX2537S 43 ABX2543S 49 ABX2549S 55 ABX2555S 64 ABX2564S 76 ABX2576S Flush ABX3518F ABX3524F Surface ABX3518S ABX3524S Flush ABX3718F ABX3724F Surface 18 ABX3718S 24 ABX3724S Box Extension Covers Only 10 covers per kit Description Cat. No. 9" Covers Surface ASPABX09S 9" Covers Flush ASPABX09F 18" Covers Surface ASPABX18S 18" Covers Flush ASPABX18F 64" to 76" Covers Surface ASPABX20S 64" to 76" Covers Flush ASPABX20F

52 Specifications A-Series Panelboards and branch breakers meet or exceed the following standards and specifications: UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes UL 67 Panelboards UL 489 Circuit Breakers NEMA AB-1 Circuit Breakers NEMA PB-1 and PB-1.1 Panelboards US Federal Spec W-P.115B Panelboards US Federal Spec W-C375b Gen Circuit Breakers Boxes Galvanized steel Blank end walls are standard; knockouts are available when specified Boxes furnished with provisions for ground bus as standard Fronts Finished in ANSI-61 grey polyester powder coat paint. Equipped with corrosion-resistant Valox combination catch and lock door latch (doors over 48" high provided with 2 latches) Equipped with concealed hinges and trim adjusting screws Directory holder permanently mounted to door Panels Dead front construction Interiors are factory assembled on rigid steel frames Metal gages in accordance with UL and NEMA standards Solderless, anti-turn main lugs suitable for copper or aluminium wires are front removable and branch straps are silver-plated copper fully rated at 100 amperes Main bus is aluminum with copper branch connections unless otherwise specified Main disconnect device is identified when supplied, and numbers are provided for branch circuits Interior base assemblies are Noryl and provide breaker mounting and busbar insulation Publications E-DET-465 Certification of Seismic Compliance DE-42A Typical AL/AQ Panelboard Technical Information DEH Lighting Panels Rating Labels, Wiring Diagrams and Circuit Directory DEH 047 TED, THED, SED, SHE, SEL, SEP Circuit Breaker Mounting Instructions DEH 059 SGH, SFL, SFP Circuit Breaker Mounting Instructions DEH 060 SGH, SGL, SGP Circuit Breaker Mounting Instructions DEH 061 SKH, SKL, SKP Circuit Breaker Mounting Instructions DEH 065 TQD, THQD Circuit Breaker Mounting Instructions GE 41 Woodford Avenue, Plainville, CT General Electric Company imagination at work DE-42A REV 02 (6/08)

53 Straight Blade Devices 2 Pole, 3 Wire Grounding 15 and 20 Ampere, 125 Volts Heavy Duty, Specification Grade, Construction and Commercial Series Duplex Receptacles Construction Series, Heavy Duty, Specification Grade Duplex Receptacles Back and Side Wired Description Color Catalog Numbers Smooth nylon face. Brown CR5252 CR5352 Ivory CR5252I CR5352I Gray CR5252GY CR5352GY F S White CR5252W CR5352W Fed.Spec. Black CR5252BK CR5352BK Office White CR5252OW CR5352OW Red CR5252R CR5352R Commercial Series Heavy Duty, Specification Grade Duplex Receptacles Side Wired Only Description Color Catalog Numbers Smooth nylon face. Brown CR15 CR20 Ivory CR15I CR20I Gray CR15GRY CR20GRY White CR15WHI CR20WHI Black CR15BLK CR20BLK Office White CR15OW CR20OW Commercial Series Heavy Duty, Specification Grade Duplex Receptacles Side Wired, Open Terminals Description Color Catalog Numbers Smooth nylon face. Brown CRO15 CRO20 Ivory CRO15I CRO20I Gray CRO15GRY CRO20GRY White CRO20WHI Black CRO20BLK Notes: See Section K for wallplates. Horsepower ratings listed above are AC only. 3.28" (83.3) 3.28" (83.3) 3.28" (83.3) 1.41" (35.8) CR " (35.8) CR " (35.8) CRO " (69.3).83" (21.1) 2.73" (69.3).83" (21.1) 2.73" (69.3).83" (21.1) Straight Blade Devices 2P 3W, 15A & 20A, 125V Construction & Commercial Receptacles Dimensions in Inches (mm) A-11

54

55

56

57

58 Construction and Commercial Toggle Switches AC Switches 15 and 20 Ampere, Volts AC Construction and Commercial Series Specification Grade AC Toggle Switches with Ground Screw #6-32 TAP 3.28" 2.38" (83.3) (60.5) #6-32 TAP 3.28" 2.38" (83.3) (60.5) #6-32 TAP 3.28" 2.38" (83.3) (60.5) #6-32 TAP 3.28" 2.38" (83.3) (60.5) 1.25" (31.8) 1.31" (33.2) CS1201I 1.25" (31.8) 1.31" (33.2) CS " (31.8) 1.31" (33.2) CS115I 1.25" (31.8) 1.31" (33.2) CS " (57.9) 1.13" (28.7) 2.28" (57.9) 1.13" (28.7) 2.28" (57.9) 1.13" (28.7) 2.28" (57.9) 1.13" (28.7) Construction Series Heavy Duty Specification Grade AC Toggle Switches, Back and Side Wired 15A, V AC Catalog Numbers Description Single Pole Double Pole Three Way Four Way Brown toggle. CS1201 CS1203 Ivory toggle. CS1201I CS1203I Gray toggle. CS1201GY CS1203GY White toggle. CS1201W CS1203W Office white toggle. CS1201OW CS1203OW 20A, V AC Catalog Numbers Description Single Pole Double Pole Three Way Four Way Brown toggle. CS1221 CS1222 CS1223 CS1224 Ivory toggle. CS1221I CS1222I CS1223I CS1224I Gray toggle. CS1221GY CS1222GY CS1223GY CS1224GY White toggle. CS1221W CS1222W CS1223W CS1224W Red toggle. CS1221R CS1222R CS1223R CS1224R Black toggle. CS1221BK CS1222BK CS1223BK CS1224BK Office white toggle. CS1221OW CS1222OW CS1223OW CS1224OW Commercial Series Heavy Duty Specification Grade AC Toggle Switches, Side Wired Only. 15A, V AC Catalog Numbers Description Single Pole Double Pole Three Way Four Way Brown toggle. CS115 CS315 Ivory toggle. CS115I CS315I Gray toggle. CS115GY CS315GY White toggle. CS115W CS315W Office white toggle. CS115OW CS315OW 20A, V AC Catalog Numbers Description Single Pole Double Pole Three Way Four Way Brown toggle. CS120 CS320 Ivory toggle. CS120I CS320I Gray toggle. CS120GY CS320GY White toggle. CS120W CS320W Office white toggle. CS120OW CS320OW Notes: See Section K for wall plates. See page C-30 for wiring diagrams. For accessories see pages C-23 C-25. HP Conversion Chart 120V 208V 240V 277VAC 15A.5 HP 1.5HP 2HP 2HP 20A 1 HP 2HP 2HP 2HP 30A 2HP 2HP 2HP 2HP C-6 Dimensions in Inches (mm) F S Fed.Spec.

59 GE Electrical Distribution Spec Setter Safety Switches We help you get the job done right! imagination at work

60 General Electric s Spec Setter safety switches are available for all your disconnect needs, no matter what the application. GE offers a wide variety of general duty switches for residential and light commercial purposes, while our extensive line of heavy duty switches is best suited for commercial and industrial applications. For the toughest industrial environments like cement foundries, steel mills and processing plants mill duty switches are available. We also offer a variety of double throw switches for emergency generators. No matter what the application, we ve got you covered with a rugged, reliable and easy-to-install Spec Setter safety switch. When it comes to getting the job done right, you can count on GE!

61 GE Safety Switches at a Glance NEMA Type Enclosure Type 30 A 60 A 100 A 200 A 400 A 600 A 800 A 1200 A 2 & 3 Pole (Fusible) 240Vac General Duty 3 Pole (Non-Fusible) 240Vac 2 & 3 Pole (Fusible) 240Vac 1 Heavy Duty 2 Pole (Fusible & Non-Fusible) 600Vdc 3 Pole (Fusible & Non-Fusible) 600Vac 3 Pole (Non-Fusible) 240Vac & 600Vac Double-Throw 3 Pole (Fusible) 240Vac 3 Pole (Fusible) 600Vac General Duty 2 Pole (Non-Fusible) 240Vac 2 & 3 Pole (Fusible) 240Vac Heavy Duty 2 Pole (Fusible & Non-Fusible) 600Vdc 3 Pole (Fusible) 600Vac 3 Pole (Non-Fusible) 600Vac 3R 3 Pole (Fusible) 600Vac 2 Pole (Non-Fusible) Double-Throw 120/240Vac 3 Pole (Non-Fusible) 240Vac 3 Pole (Fusible) 240Vac 3 Pole (Non-Fusible) 600Vac 2 & 3 Pole (Fusible) 240Vac Heavy Duty 2 Pole (Fusible & Non-Fusible) 600Vdc 3 Pole (Fusible) 600Vac 4/4X 3 Pole (Non-Fusible) 600Vac 2 & 3 Pole (Fusible) 240Vdc Mill Duty 2 Pole (Fusible & Non-Fusible) 600Vdc 3 Pole (Fusible & Non-Fusible) 600Vac 5/12 Heavy Duty 2 & 3 Pole (Fusible) 240Vac 2 Pole (Fusible & Non-Fusible) 600Vdc 3 Pole (Fusible) 600Vac (also available in 3R) 3 Pole (Non-Fusible) 600Vac 12 Mill Duty 2 & 3 Pole (Fusible) 240Vdc 2 Pole (Fusible & Non-Fusible) 600Vdc 3 Pole (Fusible & Non-Fusible) 600Vac Safety Switch Nomenclature TH N J DC Switch Fusing Number Number Maximum Ampere Enclosure Other Type of Wires of Poles Voltage Rating Type Features Rating TG = General Duty N = Non-Fusible 2 = 2 wire system 2 = 2 Poles 2 = 240 Vac 1 = 30 amps (Blank) = NEMA Type 1 B = Bottom Feed TH = Heavy Duty (blank) = Fusible 3 = 3 wire system 3 = 3 Poles 6 = 600 Vac 2 = 60 amps J = NEMA 5/12 CL = Copper Lugs 4 = 4 wire system 6 = 6 Poles 3 = 100 amps M = NEMA 12 (MILL DUTY) DC = 600 Vdc Rated 4 = 200 amps R = NEMA Type 3R F = Vertically Hinged Door 5 = 400 amps SS = NEMA 4/4X (304SS) W = Viewing Window 6 = 600 amps SS316 = NEMA 4/4X (316SS) Nomenclature provided for interpreting product numbers only.

62 General Duty Safety Switches GE s Type TG general duty safety switches are designed for residential and light commercial applications where duty is not severe. They are available in amps, 240 Vac, 250 Vdc maximum in both fusible and non-fusible units, and in NEMA Type 1 (indoor) and Type 3R (outdoor) enclosures. The UL Listed short-circuit rating is 10,000 rms symmetrical amps as standard. When Class R fuses and fuse kits are installed, amp switches have a UL Listed short circuit rating of 100,000 rms symmetrical amps. GE s general duty safety switches are UL Listed as service entrance equipment when installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code. All GE general duty safety switches are UL Listed and CSA certified (UL98 Enclosed Switches/CSA-C22.2 No. 4-04) and meet NEMA Enclosed Safety Switch Standard KS Best suited for residential and light commercial applications. Available in indoor (Type 1) and outdoor (Type 3R) enclosures. 2 Highly visible ON/OFF label takes the guesswork out of safety and gives a clean, modern appearance. 3 Bright red handle is easy to see, easy to grip. 4 Direct-drive, quick-make, quick-break mechanism snaps the contacts open and closed, providing positive ON/OFF indication while prolonging switch life. 5 Wide, unobstructed gutter and removable interior make wire pulling and lug connections quick and easy. 6 Three-point mounting pattern speeds installation and simplifies ganging in close quarters. 7 Plated stationary and movable contacts deliver reliability and long life. 8 Galvanized steel enclosure offers superior rust protection in outdoor applications. There s also a durable polyester powder-coat finish. 9 Plated blades provide visible confirmation of contact position.

63 Heavy Duty Safety Switches GE s Type TH heavy duty safety switches are designed for commercial and industrial applications where safety, high performance and continuity of service are essential. Heavy duty switches are available in amps, 600 Vac, 600 Vdc maximum, fusible and non-fusible units, and in NEMA Type 1 (indoor), Type 3R (outdoor), Type 4/4X (water and dust-tight, corrosion resistant), and Type 5/12 (drip and dust-tight) enclosures. When used with Class R or J fuses, amp switches have a UL Listed short-circuit rating of 200,000 rms symmetrical amps. Switches rated amps use Class L fuses and have a UL Listed short circuit rating of 100,000 rms symmetrical amps. GE s heavy duty safety switches are UL Listed as service entrance equipment when installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code. All GE heavy duty safety switches are UL Listed and CSA certified (UL98 Enclosed Switches/CSA-C22.2 No. 4-04), meet Federal Specification WS-865C for heavy duty switches and meet NEMA Enclosed Safety Switch Standard KS Best suited for commercial and industrial applications. 2 Highly visible ON/OFF label takes the guesswork out of safety and gives a clean, modern appearance. 3 Bright red donut handle, molded from rugged SE1 Noryl thermoplastic, is easy to see, easy to grip and ideal for hook stick operation. It accepts three padlocks in OFF position. 4 Coin-proof, defeatable dual interlocks meet all safety inspection requirements. 5 Wide, unobstructed gutter and removable interior make wire pulling and lug connections quick and easy. 6 Three-point mounting pattern speeds installation and simplifies ganging in close quarters. 7 Exclusive SE1 Noryl thermoplastic arc shield helps provide maximum UL Listed horsepower ratings while guarding against accidental contact with live parts. 8 Accessories, such as auxiliary switch kits, are UL Listed for quick and easy field installation (or they may be factory installed). 9 Plated blades provide visible confirmation of contact position. 10 Direct-drive, quick-make, quick-break mechanism snaps the contacts open and closed, providing positive ON/OFF indication while prolonging switch life. 11 Spring-reinforced fuse clips assure reliable contact for cool operation. Suitable for Class H, K, J or R fuses. 12 Cu-Al lugs are 60/75 C rated to permit greater wire selection. 13 Galvanized steel enclosure offers superior rust protection in outdoor applications. There s also a durable polyester powder-coat finish.

64 Mill Duty Safety Switches GE s mill duty safety switches are designed specifically for the rugged conditions found in steel mills, cement foundries and other process-related environments. Mill duty switches are available in amps, 600 Vac, 600 Vdc maximum, fusible and non-fusible units, and in NEMA Type 4/4X (water and dust-tight, corrosion resistant) and Type 12 (drip and dust-tight) enclosures. Horsepower ratings are to UL Listed maximums; published I 2 t ratings are available. Short circuit ratings are UL Listed to 200,000 rms symmetrical amps when Class J or R fuses are installed. All GE mill duty safety switches are UL Listed and CSA certified (UL98 Enclosed Switches/CSA-C22.2 No. 4-04), meet Federal Specification WS-865C for heavy duty switches and meet NEMA Enclosed Safety Switch Standard KS Best suited for rugged environmental conditions such as mills and foundries. 2 Bright red donut handle molded from rugged SE1 Noryl thermoplastic is easy to see, easy to grip and ideal for hook stick operation. It accepts three padlocks in OFF position. 3 Manual interlock defeat lever permits contact inspection when switch is OFF. 4 Standard NEMA 12 enclosure protects interior from dust, lint, fibers, coolants, metal filings and other non-corrosive contaminants. Stainless steel NEMA 4/4X enclosure additionally shields interior from hose directed water, splashing and falling liquids. Interlocks on all enclosure covers assure gasket compression before switch can be turned ON. 5 Efficient space-saving enclosures, three-point mounting, unobstructed side wiring gutter, easily removable cover and interior. 6 Spring-reinforced fuse clips assure reliable contact for cool operation. Suitable for Class H, K, J or R fuses. 7 Equipment ground lugs provided. Lugs approved for both copper and aluminum wire; 60/75 C rated tang lugs are field convertible to compression (crimp) connectors. 8 Highly visible ON/OFF label takes the guesswork out of safety and gives a clean, modern appearance.

65 Double-Throw Safety Switches 1 Bright red donut handle molded from rugged SE1 Noryl thermoplastic is easy to see, easy to grip and ideal for hook stick operation. 2 Highly visible ON/OFF label takes the guesswork out of safety and gives a clean, modern appearance. 3 Three position (ON-OFF-ON) handle is lockable. 4 Lockable cover latch and defeatable interlock meet all safety inspection requirements GE s Type TC and TDT double-throw safety switches are designed for applications where safety, high performance and continuity of service are essential. Double-throw switches are available in amps, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc maximum in fusible and non-fusible construction, and in NEMA Type 1 (indoor) and Type 3R (outdoor) enclosures. GE s double-throw safety switches are UL Listed as service entrance equipment when installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code. All GE double-throw safety switches are UL Listed (UL98 Enclosed Switches) and meet NEMA Enclosed Safety Switch Standard KS for type HD amps and type GD amps. Emergency Power Transfer Switches A wide range of interchangeable rain-tight conduit hubs are available. 2 Code-gauge steel box is fitted with a drip-shield for protection against rain; resists corrosion, rust and chipping. 3 Plated copper current-carrying parts prevent oxidation to assure low-resistance contact and cool operation. 4 Mounting holes permit quick, easy installation. 5 Bonding strap can be used to ground neutral for service entrance applications. 6 Ample wiring space provided within compact enclosure. 7 Positive make and break is provided by fiber loop straps between knife blade contacts and one-piece operating yoke. 8 Provision for handle locking in ON or OFF position protects against accidental contact with live parts. 9 Concentric knockouts are conveniently located, easy to remove. 10 Galvanized steel enclosure, offers superior rust protection in outdoor applications. There s also a durable polyester powder-coat finish GE s Type TC emergency power transfer switches are specifically designed to permit the connection of power from a standby generator or other emergency source of electricity and are ideally suited for outdoor applications in rural dwellings and farm buildings. Emergency power transfer switches are non fusible and are available in amps for 120/240V three-wire systems and in 200 amps for 240V four-wire systems and in NEMA Type 3R (outdoor) enclosures. The side operated handle can be locked in either the ON or OFF position. Type TC emergency power transfer switches are UL Listed (UL98 Enclosed Switches) and are suitable for use as service entrance equipment when installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code.

66 Enclosure Types NEMA 1 enclosures are suitable for indoor use, primarily to provide protection against contact with the enclosed equipment and where unusual service environments do not exist. NEMA 3R enclosures are intended for outdoor use to provide a degree of protection against falling rain, sleet and external enclosure ice formation. NEMA 4/4X enclosures are intended for indoor or outdoor use to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain, and splashing or hose-directed water and external enclosure ice formation. Additionally, these enclosures meet 4X requirements by providing a degree of protection against corrosion. NEMA 5/12 enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against settling airborne and circulating dust, falling dirt and dripping, non-corrosive liquids. Accessories GE safety switches provide a full line of factory and field installable accessories to meet your special requirements. Equipment Ground Kits: available for amp safety switches Neutral Kits: available for amp safety switches (insulated, groundable and bondable) Crimp Type Connector: available for amp safety switches Viewing Window: available for select amp heavy duty safety switches, NEMA Types 4/4X and 5/12 Auxiliary Contact Kits: available in both single pole double-throw and double pole double-throw (listed for field installation) Class J Fuse Conversion Kits: available for 600 amp safety switches Class R Fuse Kits: available for amp safety switches Raintight Aluminum Hubs: available up to 3" conduit diameter Special Purpose GE Safety Switches GE provides the following special purpose safety switches to satisfy a variety of unique applications: Six-Pole Switches: available in amps, 600 Vac, 250 Vdc maximum, fusible or non-fusible, NEMA Type 1 enclosure. Interlocked Receptacle Switches: available in 60 amps, 600 Vac, fusible or non-fusible, NEMA Type 12 enclosure. Plug-Fuse Switches: available in one and two-pole designs, 30 amps, 240 Vac maximum, NEMA Type 1 enclosure. Air Conditioner Disconnects: available in amps, fusible or non-fusible, NEMA Type 3R enclosure (steel or thermoplastic available). Information provided is subject to change without notice. Please verify all details with GE. All values are design or typical values when measured under laboratory conditions, and GE makes no warranty or guarantee, express or implied, that such performance will be obtained under end-use conditions. GE 41 Woodford Avenue, Plainville, CT General Electric Company imagination at work GEA-12144A (10/09)

67

68 Digital Energy Power Quality Product Specification Tranquell A-Series Integrally Mounted Surge Protective Device (SPD) Enhanced Thermal Protection (ETP) Series Medium Exposure - Rated 65kA to 100kA Per Mode STANDARDS UL rd Edition UL 1283 UL 96A CSA C22.2 (cul) ANSI/IEEE C , C , C IEEE IEEE C62.62 IEEE C62.72 NEMA LS (R2000) MIL-STD-220B ANSI/NFPA70, NEC (Article 285) ELECTRICAL Maximum Surge Current The maximum surge current rating based on the 8/20 s test waveform is as follows. The rating is based on testing of a complete SPD unit and all components that make up the SPD system are expressed per mode. Part Number Mode L-L Mode L-N Mode N-G Mode L-G Phase (L-N + L-G) TPMExxxx06* 65kA 65kA 65kA 65kA 130kA TPMExxxx08* 80kA 80kA 80kA 80kA 160kA TPMExxxx10* 100kA 100kA 100kA 100kA 200kA * See Model Number Suffix Descriptions Table Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) 115% of nominal system voltage or greater (depending on model voltage type). 125% on 120 volts models. Minimum Repetitive Surge Current Capacity The Tranquell ME 65kA 100kA rated device is capable of surviving the following impulses, at one-minute intervals, without failure and with less than 10% change in protective characteristics. IEEE C62.41 Category C3 (High) Exposure Level, 10kA / 8x20 s: 5,000 impulses UL 1449 Nominal Discharge Current Rating (In) 20kA - Rated for use on UL 96A Lightning Protection Systems UL Witness Fault Current Withstand (NEC SCCR) Rating: 100,000A SPD Type / Recommended Locations Service Entrance Equipment, Primary Distribution Equipment, Secondary Distribution Equipment, Lighting Panels - Rated for UL and NEC 2008 Type 1 and Type 2 Installation Locations DET-516 (12/09) Page 1 of 4

69 UL-1449, 3rd Edition Voltage Protection Rating (VPR) UL rd Edition Voltage Protection Ratings (VPR) Model Voltage Type L-N L-G N-G L-L TPME120S TPME120Y TPME220Y TPME240D n/a 900 n/a 1800 TPME240H 700 / 1200HL 600 / 1000HL / 1900HL TPME240Y TPME277Y TPME347Y TPME480D n/a 1500 n/a 3000 UL-1449, 2nd Edition Suppression Voltage Rating (SVR)* UL nd Edition Suppressed Voltage Ratings (SVR) Model Voltage Type L-N L-G N-G L-L TPME120S TPME120Y TPME220Y TPME240D n/a 800 n/a 1500 TPME240H 500 / 700HL 500 / 700HL TPME240Y TPME277Y TPME347Y TPME480D n/a 1500 n/a 3000 *SVR ratings are no longer assigned by UL and are provided for reference purposes only. VPR ratings now supersede SVR ratings per UL rd Edition Standard, effective Sept. 29, IEEE C62.41 Clamping Voltages Cat. B Ringwave 100kHz / 500A Cat. B/C Low Combination Wave 8x20us 6kV / 3kA Cat. C High Combination Wave 8x20us 10kV / 10kA Model Type L-N L-G N-G L-L L-N L-G N-G L-L L-N L-G N-G L-L TPME120S TPME120Y TPME220Y TPME240D n/a 733 n/a 1207 n/a 720 n/a 1413 n/a 840 n/a 1547 TPME240H TPME240Y TPME277Y TPME347Y TPME480D n/a 1177 n/a 1643 n/a 1380 n/a 2607 n/a 1547 n/a 2880 DET-516 (12/09) Page 2 of 4

70 EMI RFI Filtering / Noise Attenuation / Sinewave Tracking The EMI-RFI noise rejection or attenuation value is measured in accordance with the procedures outlined in NEMA LS /MIL STD-220B. Noise Filter Capability: 50db 100kHz. Fusing Individually fused Thermally Protected MOV Technology. Monitoring Features The SPD is monitored with a green indicating light per each phase, and red service light. Audible alarm with silencer & test switch Contacts for remote monitoring (2 amp, 125VAC)-(1 AMP, 30 VDC) Optional 6 Digit LCD re-settable surge event counter Connection Direct Bus Connection. Solid Copper Bus Conductors. Model Number Suffix Descriptions P/N Suffix Description Mounting UL Type AS Full Equipped With All Monitoring and Filter Options Factory Installed in GE A-Series Panels Type 2 ASNF All Monitoring Features/No Filtering Factory Installed in GE A-Series Panels Type 2 ASNC No Surge Counter or Filtering Factory Installed in GE A-Series Panels Type 2 AST1 Full Equipped With All Monitoring and Filter Options Factory Installed in GE A-Series Panels Type 1 Environmental and External Conditions Temperature -40 F (-40 C ) to +149 F (+65 C ) Operating Altitude 0-12,000 ft (3.66 km) Surface Temperature Less than 131 F ( 55 C ) Humidity 0-95% RH Noise No Audible Noise Frequency 50/60 Hz Warranty Standard GE Terms and Conditions cover the GE SPD for a period of 5 years. DET-516 (12/09) Page 3 of 4

71 DIMENSIONS GE Digital Energy Power Quality 830 W 40th Street, Chicago, IL USA Information subject to change without notice. Please verify all details with GE General Electric Company All Rights Reserved DET-516 (12/09) Page 4 of 4

72 GE Digital Energy Power Quality Introduction Recommended installation locations are primary and secondary distribution and point of use levels. Designed for distribution and point of use locations, but rated for service entrance, the Tranquell ME with enhanced thermal protection has been third-party tested to ANSI/ IEEE C3 10kA 8x20μs impulses. The Tranquell ME Series is designed for rigorous duty and long life, as evidenced in our outstanding minimum repetitive surge current capacity test results. These Surge Protective Device (SPD) models connect directly to GE A-Series panelboard bus bars without adding width or depth to the panel enclosure. Third-party tested per IEEE C62.62 and NEMA LS-1 for the rated 8x20μs surge current, per mode with fusing included. Mounted to the bus bars, a breaker feeder is not required or used. This design allows for maximum protection. Ratings are available from 65kA to 100kA per mode (130kA to 200kA per phase). GE engineers design and build surge protective devices in our state-of-the-art lab and production facilities. Extensive testing is performed at GE and third-party test labs across North America. Features and Benefits > UL rd Edition, Type 1 or Type 2 > UL 96A Lightning Protection Systems > Optional UL 1283 noise filtering. The SPD device EMI- RFI noise rejection or attenuation value is measured in accordance with the procedures outlined in NEMA LS (R2000)/MIL STD-220B. Attenuation is -50db 100kHz. > UL tested to 100,000 amperes symmetrical withstand > Device is capable of surviving a minimum of 5,000 category C3 impulses (10kA, 20kV) per mode > Thermally protected MOVs eliminate the need for additional upstream fuses > NO/NC Form C dry type contacts for remote monitoring > Third-party tested to maximum surge rating as a complete assembly > 10 modes of protection (L-N, L-G, N-G, L-L) > Green status indicating lights, red service light > Audible alarm with test/disable feature > Optional LCD surge counter > Factory installed in GE A-Series Panelboards, UL 67 listed > 5 year limited warranty (standard), 10 year limited warranty (optional) Integrated Tranquell ME Surge Protective Device (SPD) with Enhanced Thermal Protection Direct Bus Connected Within GE A-Series Panelboards Typical GE A-Series Branch Panel Interior

73 Technical Specifications Operating Frequency 50/60 Hz Connection Direct Bus, Parallel Connected Operating Temperature -40 F to 149 F (-40 C to +65 C) Operating Humidity 0% to 95% Non-Condensing Weight 13 lbs. (5.9 kg) Dimensions [152.40] [128.62] NOTE: All dimensions are for reference only and are shown in Inches [millimeters] [135.41] [33.81] [7.91] TYP [241.15] [238.76] [211.36] [72.87] [ 5.99] HOLE (4 PLACES) Nominal Voltage (Volts RMS) System Voltage Configuration MCOV Max. Continuous Operating Voltage L-N/G (Vrms) 120S 120/240 1 Ph, 3 W + G Y 120Y/208 3 Ph, 4 W + G D 240 Delta 3 Ph, 3 W H 120/240 Delta HL 3 Ph, 4 W + G 150/270 HL 240Y 240Y/415 3 Ph, 4 W + G Y 277Y/480 3 Ph, 4 W + G Y 220Y/380 3 Ph, 4 W + G D 480 Delta 3 Ph, 3 W Y 347Y/600 3 Ph, 4 W + G Maximum Surge Current Capacity Per Mode 65kA 80kA 100kA Per Phase 130kA 160kA 200kA Phase Rating = (L-N + L-G) Catalog # example: TPME277Y10AS AS = Full featured, with UL 1283 noise filtering and surge counter for UL Type 2 locations ASNF = without EMI/RFI noise filtering (Available 100kA per Mode) only for UL Type 2 locations ASNC = without EMI/RFI noise filtering, without surge counter for UL Type 2 locations (Available 100kA per Mode) only AST1 = Full featured, with UL 1283 noise filtering and surge counter for UL Type 1 locations 277Y/480 V, 3 Ph, 4 W + G 100kA per mode Full featured, with UL 1283 noise filtering and surge counter Protection Ratings Voltage Code 120S / 120Y 240D 240H 220Y / 240Y / 277Y 347Y 480D Protection Mode L-N L-G N-G L-L L-G L-L L-N HL-N L-G HL-G N-G L-L HL-L L-N L-G N-G L-L L-N L-G N-G L-L L-G L-L UL 1449, 3 rd Edition Voltage Protection Ratings (VPR) (assigned UL rating) UL 1449, 2 nd Edition Suppression Voltage Ratings (SVR) (assigned UL rating) * B3 Ring Wave Clamping 6kV, 500A C3 Combo Wave Clamping 20kV, 10kA * NOTE: SVR Ratings are no longer assigned by UL and are included in the table above for reference purposes only. GE Digital Energy Power Quality 830 W 40th Street, Chicago, IL USA Information subject to change without notice. Please verify all details with GE. DEA-390 (12/09) 2009 General Electric Company All Rights Reserved

74 GE Digital Energy Power Quality Introduction GE Surge Protective Devices (SPD) are engineered for reliability, flexibility and long life in the most extreme surge environment. The true maximum surge current rating has been proven successful in third-party tests. These SPD models connect to the panelboard or switchboard bus bars without adding width or depth to the panel enclosure, and only occupying 7X of vertical bus space. Third-party tested per IEEE C62.62 and NEMA LS-1 for the rated 8x20µs surge current, per mode with fusing included. Standard features include a surge counter, audible alarm, indicating lights, dry contacts and an integral surge rated disconnect. Rating options range from 65kA per mode to 300kA per mode. All mode protection is provided with surge components (MOVs) connected on the phase to neutral, phase to ground and neutral to ground paths as appropriate for the voltage configuration. Technical Specifications Nominal Discharge Current (In) 20kA Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) 200kA Operating Frequency 50/60Hz Connection 6 to 2/0 Conductors, Parallel Connected Operating Temperature -40 F to 149 F (-40 C to +65 C) Operating Humidity 0% to 95% Non-Condensing Weight 24 lbs. (10.89 kg) Features and Benefits > UL rd Edition, Type 1 or Type 2 > UL 1283, EMI/RFI noise filter > UL 96A, Lightning Protection System > cul, CSA C22.2 > Integral surge rated disconnect > Compact design requires only 7X height of space > Tranquell ME device is tested to a minimum of 5,000 category C3 impulses (10kA, 20kV) per mode > Tranquell HE device is tested to a minimum of 20,000 category C3 impulses (10kA, 20kV) per mode > Industrial-sized MOV technology > Thermally protected MOVs eliminate the need for additional upstream overcurrent protection > Form C dry contacts for remote monitoring > Green status indicating lights, red alarm light > Audible alarm with test/disable feature > LCD surge counter > 5 year limited warranty (standard), 10 year limited warranty (optional) Integrated Tranquell HE & ME Surge Protective Device (SPD) with Enhanced Thermal Protection Designed for GE Distribution Equipment

75 Nominal Voltage (Volts RMS) System Voltage Configuration MCOV Max. Continuous Operating Voltage L-N/G (Vrms) Exposure Level Maximum Surge Current Capacity Per Mode Per Phase TPHE 120S 120/240 1 Ph, 3 W + G TPME 65kA 130kA TPME 120Y 120Y/208 3 Ph, 4 W + G TPME 80kA 160kA 220Y 220Y/380 3 Ph, 4 W + G TPME 100kA 200kA 240D 240 Delta 3 Ph, 3 W TPHE 125kA 250kA 240H 120/240 Delta HL 3 Ph, 4 W + G 150/270 HL 15 TPHE 150kA 300kA 240Y 240Y/415 3 Ph, 4 W + G TPHE 200kA 400kA 277Y 277Y/480 3 Ph, 4 W + G TPHE 250kA 500kA 347Y 347Y/600 3 Ph, 4 W + G TPHE 300kA 600kA 480D 480 Delta 3 Ph, 3 W 550 PP SG ME PPT1 SGT1 For all ka ratings (integral to Spectra panel or switchboard) for UL Type 2 Locations For all TPHE devices (125kA - 300kA) integral to switchgear for UL Type 2 Locations For all ka ratings (integral to MCC) for UL Type 2 Locations For all ka ratings (integral to Spectra panel or switchboard) for UL Type 1 Locations For all TPHE devices (125kA - 300kA) integral to switchgear for UL Type 1 Locations MET1 For all ka ratings (integral to MCC) for UL Type 1 Locations Protection Ratings Voltage Code 120S / 120Y 240D 240H 220Y / 240Y / 277Y 347Y 480D Protection Mode L-N L-G N-G L-L L-G L-L L-N HL-N L-G HL-G N-G L-L HL-L L-N L-G N-G L-L L-N L-G N-G L-L L-G L-L UL 1449, 3 rd edition Voltage Protection Ratings (VPR) (assigned UL rating) UL 1449, 2 nd edition Suppression Voltage Ratings (SVR) (assigned UL rating) * B3 Ring Wave Clamping 6kV, 500A C3 Combo Wave Clamping 20kV, 10kA * NOTE: SVR Ratings are no longer assigned by UL and are included in the table above for reference purposes only. Dimensions [8.636] [ ] [ ] [ 7.112] HOLE (4 PLACES) [ ] [ ] [ ] TYP [67.004] TYP [ ] NOTE: All dimensions are for reference only and are shown in inches [millimeters] See instruction manual for details GE Digital Energy Power Quality 830 W 40th Street, Chicago, IL USA Information subject to change without notice. Please verify all details with GE. DEA-391 (3/10) 2010 General Electric Company All Rights Reserved

76

77 General Purpose Fuses FLNR_ID/FLSR_ID Indicator Class RK5 Fuses 250/600 VAC Dual-Element, Time Delay 1/ Amperes Applications Littelfuse FLNR_ID/FLSR_ID Indicator fuses provide blown fuse indication at a glance. The patented state-of-the-art solid state design provides maximum reliability and superior performance characteristics in a true dual-element design. The use of Indicator fuses reduces downtime and nuisance openings, increases safety, and can save thousands of dollars in lost production time. Service entrance switches Switchboard main and feeder switches Motor control center mains and motor branch circuits Individual fused combination motor controllers Distribution panelboards Industrial control panels Protection of fully rated panelboards and loadcenters All general purpose circuits Features/Benefits Reduce Downtime A glance at the indicating window of a FLNR_ID or FLSR_ID Indicator fuse pinpoints open fuses. If the indicating strip is black, the fuse has opened. It s that simple. Reduce Nuisance Opening FLNR_ID and FLSR_ID Indicator fuses have superior time-delay and cycling characteristics which can lengthen fuse life and decrease needless opening. Reduce Fuse Inventory Because FLNR_ID and FLSR_ID Indicator fuses have superior performance characteristics, they can be used on a variety of ap pli ca tions, thus decreasing fuse inventory. Reduce Equipment Damage FLNR_ID and FLSR_ID Indicator fuses have superior overload and short-circuit protection which can reduce equipment damage. Reduce Accidents The FLNR_ID and FLSR_ID Indicator fuses improve safety by minimizing exposure to live circuits. Unlike other forms of blown fuse indication, it doesn t matter if the power is on or off. No second guessing whether a light means a fuse is good or bad, and no current going across a blown fuse to power a lighted accessory. General Purpose Fuses Specifications Ampere Ratings Voltage Ratings: Interrupting Ratings: Ampere Range: Approvals: AC: 250 Volts (FLNR_ID); 600 Volts (FLSR_ID) DC: 125 Volts (FLNR A); 125 Volts (FLNR_ID A); 300 Volts (FLSR_ID) AC: 200,000 amperes rms symmetrical 300,000 amperes rms sym met ri cal (Littelfuse self-certified) DC: 20,000 amperes amperes Standard , Class RK5 UL Listed (File No: E81895) CSA Certified (File No: LR29862) QPL: Federal Specification WF ** * *FLSR_ID only **FLNR only Ex am ple part number (series & am per age): FLSR100ID NOTE: For ampere 250 volt fuses, order non-indicating FLNR series fuses. NOTE: All FLNR_ID fuses rated A are Indicator fuses. NOTE: All FLSR_ID fuses rated 1 amp and above are Indicator fuses. Recommended Fuse Blocks LR250 series (for FLNR_ID series fuses) LR600 series (for FLSR_ID series fuses) Refer to Blocks & Holders section of this catalog for ad di tion al in for ma tion Littelfuse POWR-GARD Products Catalog 29

78 General Purpose Fuses FLNR_ID/FLSR_ID Indicator Class RK5 Fuses 250/600 VAC Dual-Element, Time Delay 1/ Amperes F A K A C E General Purpose Fuses Amperes G Refer To Fig. No. 1 / E Series B C D H FIG. 1 FIG. 2 J B Dimensions In Inches (mm in parentheses) F D G A A B C D E F G H J K FLNR 2 (50.8) 1 2 (12.7) 1 2 (12.7) 9 16 (14.3) 5 64 (2.0) 5 32 (4.0) 3 8 (9.5) FLSR_ID 5 (127.0) 3 4 (19.1) 5 8 (15.9) (20.6) 3 32 (2.4) 3 16 (4.8) 5 8 (15.9) FLNR_ID 3 (76.2) 3 4 (19.1) 5 8 (15.9) (20.6) 3 32 (2.4) 3 16 (4.8) 5 8 (15.9) FLSR_ID (139.7) 1 (25.4) 5 8 (15.9) (27.0) 3 32 (2.4) 1 4 (6.4) 7 8 (22.2) FLNR_ID (149.2) 1 (25.4) (27.0) (27.0) 1 8 (3.2) 3 4 (19.1) (31.8) 1 4 (6.4) 9 32 (7.1) 1 2 (12.7) FLSR_ID (200.0) (31.8) (27.0) (33.3) 1 8 (3.2) 3 4 (19.1) (38.1) 1 4 (6.4) 9 32 (7.1) 1 2 (12.7) FLNR_ID (181.0) (38.1) (37.3) (40.5) 3 16 (4.8) (28.6) (46.8) 7 16 (11.1) 9 32 (7.1) (17.5) FLSR_ID (244.5) (44.5) (37.3) (46.8) 3 16 (4.8) (28.6) (53.2) 7 16 (11.1) 9 32 (7.1) (17.5) FLNR_ID (219.1) 2 (50.8) (49.2) (53.2) 1 4 (6.4) (41.3) (59.5) 5 8 (15.9) (10.3) (23.8) FLSR_ID (295.3) (63.5) 2 (50.8) (65.9) 1 4 (6.4) (41.3) (72.2) 5 8 (15.9) (10.3) (23.8) FLNR_ID (263.5) (63.5) (60.3) (65.9) 1 4 (6.4) 2 (50.8) (72.2) 3 4 (19.1) (13.5) (28.6) FLSR_ID (339.7) 3 (76.2) (61.1) (78.6) 1 4 (6.4) 2 (50.8) (84.9) 3 4 (19.1) (13.5) (28.6) For additional application information request Product Bulletin EL-4 FLNR /10A 1/4A 3/10A 4/10A 1/2A 6/10A 8/10A 1A 1 1/4A 1 4/10A 2A 2 1/2A 4 1/2A 5A 7A 7 1/2A 9A FLSR_ID A 1.25A 1.6A 2A 2.5A 3A 4A 6A 10A 15A 20A 25A 30A TIME IN SECONDS TIME IN SECONDS CURRENT IN AMPERES CURRENT IN AMPERES Littelfuse POWR-GARD Products Catalog

79 General Purpose Fuses FLNR_ID/FLSR_ID Indicator Class RK5 Fuses 250/600 VAC Dual-Element, Time Delay 1/ Amperes Current-Limiting Effects of FLNR_ID (250V) fuses Short-Circuit Current* Apparent RMS Symmetrical Current for Various Fuse Ratings 30A 60A 100A 200A 400A 600A 5,000 1,400 2,100 3,100 5,000 5,000 5,000 10,000 1,550 2,500 3,900 6,500 9,500 10,000 15,000 2,000 3,150 4,400 7,250 10,500 14,000 20,000 2,250 3,400 5,000 8,250 12,000 16,000 25,000 2,400 3,750 5,250 9,000 12,500 16,500 30,000 2,550 4,100 5,600 9,500 13,500 18,000 35,000 2,650 4,300 5,800 9,750 14,000 19,000 40,000 2,800 4,400 6,250 10,250 15,000 20,000 50,000 3,000 5,000 6,500 10,500 16,000 21,000 60,000 3,200 5,250 7,000 11,500 17,000 23,000 80,000 3,400 5,750 7,500 12,500 19,000 25, ,000 3,850 6,000 8,000 13,500 21,000 27, ,000 4,100 7,000 9,000 15,200 24,000 31, ,000 4,300 7,500 9,750 16,500 26,000 34,000 * Prospective RMS Symmetrical Amperes Short-Circuit Current Note: Data Derived from Peak Let-Thru Curves General Purpose Fuses Current-Limiting Effects of FLSR_ID (600V) fuses Short-Circuit Current* Apparent RMS Symmetrical Current for Various Fuse Ratings 30A 60A 100A 200A 400A 600A 5,000 1,250 2,100 3,200 5,000 5,000 5,000 10,000 1,600 2,850 4,300 7,250 10,000 10,000 15,000 1,800 3,400 5,000 8,500 13,500 15,000 20,000 2,250 3,800 5,500 9,500 15,750 19,000 25,000 2,450 4,100 5,700 10,250 17,000 21,000 30,000 2,700 4,500 6,400 10,750 18,000 23,000 35,000 2,900 4,800 6,700 11,500 19,000 24,250 40,000 3,000 5,000 7,250 12,000 19,500 27,000 50,000 3,400 5,250 7,750 13,000 21,000 29,000 60,000 3,600 5,750 8,100 14,000 22,000 30,500 80,000 3,900 6,250 9,000 15,000 24,000 33, ,000 4,300 6,750 9,750 16,500 26,000 35, ,000 4,500 7,600 11,100 19,000 28,000 38, ,000 4,600 8,400 12,250 21,500 30,000 40,000 * Prospective RMS Symmetrical Amperes Short-Circuit Current Note: Data Derived from Peak Let-Thru Curves 2005 Littelfuse POWR-GARD Products Catalog 31

80 6 5 General Purpose Fuses FLNR_ID/FLSR_ID Indicator Class RK5 Fuses 250/600 VAC Dual-Element, Time Delay 1/ Amperes FLNR_ID 60A 100A 200A 400A 600A FLSR_ID 15A 30A 60A 100A 200A 400A 600A General Purpose Fuses TIME IN SECONDS TIME IN SECONDS CURRENT IN AMPERES CURRENT IN AMPERES FLNR_ID FLSR_ID A PEAK LET - THRU IN AMPERES A 400A 200A 100A 60A PEAK LET - THRU IN AMPERES A 200A 100A 60A 30A 15A AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT SYMMETRICAL R.M.S. AMPERES AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT SYMMETRICAL R. M. S. AMPERES Littelfuse POWR-GARD Products Catalog

81 Allied PVC Electrical Conduit Formerly Georgia Pipe

82 Formerly Georgia Pipe Allied PVC Electrical Conduit UL LISTED RIGID SCH-40 & SCH-80 PVC ELECTRICAL CONDUIT Allied 1 2" through 6" PVC Electrical Conduit is Underwriters Laboratories listed and is subject to inprocess quality control testing to assure compliance with the appropriate manufacturing standards. Allied PVC Electrical Conduit is manufactured to conform to NEMA TC-2 specifications and is UL listed. For Commercial, Industrial and Utility usage: Allied PVC Electrical Conduit is proven durable and effective for years of maintenance-free performance in underground, encased and exposed applications in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Corrosion Proof: Resistant to most chemicals, PVC is not affected by any corrosive soils or salts. Non-Magnetic and Non-Galvanic: Properties of Allied PVC Electrical Conduit assure good insulation and no power loss or conductor heating. Self Extinguishing: Properties make PVC fire resistant. Impact Resistant: Allied PVC Electrical Conduit is tough, durable, and has high tensile strength, yet is easy to handle and install right on the jobsite. Underwriters Laboratories Listed and 90 C Rated: Allied Schedule-40 and Schedule-80 PVC Electrical Conduit has been listed, in accordance with the National Electrical Code, for use with 90 C conductors in underground, above ground, encased, or exposed applications S. Lathrop Ave. Harvey, Illinois (708) (800) Fax (708)

83 Allied PVC Electrical Conduit Formerly Georgia Pipe UL LISTED RIGID SCH-40 ELECTRICAL CONDUIT RATED FOR 90 DEGREE CELSIUS WIRING Allied Schedule-40 is sunlight resistant and manufactured in accordance and complies to: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. NEMA UL-651 TC-2 Meets or exceeds the requirements of NEMA TC-2 and UL-651 for Schedule 40 Conduit. Schedule 40 PVC Conduit Dimensions (10' lengths with belled ends) Trade Min. Size No. O.D. I.D. Wall Wt/Ft Ft/Pallet SPECIAL INFORMATION 1. 20' lengths available on special request. 2. Minimum shipment: full pallet quantity per size S. Lathrop Ave. Harvey, Illinois (708) (800) Fax (708)

84 Formerly Georgia Pipe Allied PVC Electrical Conduit UL LISTED EXTRA HEAVY WALL SCHEDULE-80 PVC CONDUIT 90 DEGREE CELSIUS RATED Allied Schedule-80 is sunlight resistant and manufactured in accordance and complies to: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. NEMA UL-651 TC-2 Meets or exceeds the requirements of NEMA TC-2 and UL-651 for Schedule 80 Conduit. Schedule 80 PVC Conduit Dimensions (10' lengths with belled ends) Trade Cat. Min. Size No. I.D. O.D. Wall Wt/Ft Ft/Pallet SPECIAL INFORMATION 1. 20' lengths available on special request. 2. Minimum shipment: full pallet quantity per size S. Lathrop Ave. Harvey, Illinois (708) (800) Fax (708)

85 Allied PVC Electrical Conduit Formerly Georgia Pipe RIGID PVC UTILITY DUCT RATED FOR 90 DEGREE CELSIUS WIRE TYPE DB-60 FOR DIRECT BURIAL NEMA TC-6 DB-60 Trade Part Min. Weight Ft/ Size No. O.D. Wall /foot lift ' ' ' ' ' SPECIAL INFORMATION 1. 20' lengths are standard, 10' lengths available on special request. 2. Minimum shipment: full pallet quantity per size. RIGID PVC UTILITY DUCT RATED FOR 90 DEGREE CELSIUS WIRE TYPE DB-120 FOR DIRECT BURIAL NEMA TC-8 DB-120 Trade Part Min. Weight Ft/ Size No. O.D. Wall /foot lift ' ' ' ' ' SPECIAL INFORMATION 1. 20' lengths are standard, 10' lengths available on special request. 2. Minimum shipment: full pallet quantity per size S. Lathrop Ave. Harvey, Illinois (708) (800) Fax (708)

86 Allied PVC Electrical Conduit Formerly Georgia Pipe RIGID PVC UTILITY DUCT RATED FOR 90 DEGREE CELSIUS WIRE TYPE EB-20 FOR ENCASED BURIAL NEMA TC-6 EB-20 Trade Part Min. Weight Ft/ Size No. O.D. Wall /foot lift ' ' ' ' ' SPECIAL INFORMATION 1. 20' lengths are standard, 10' lengths available on special request. 2. Minimum shipment: full pallet quantity per size. RIGID PVC UTILITY DUCT RATED FOR 90 DEGREE CELSIUS WIRE TYPE EB-35 FOR ENCASED BURIAL NEMA TC-8 EB-35 Trade Part Min. Weight Ft/ Size No. O.D. Wall /foot lift ' ' ' ' ' SPECIAL INFORMATION 1. 20' lengths are standard, 10' lengths available on special request. 2. Minimum shipment: full pallet quantity per size S. Lathrop Ave. Harvey, Illinois (708) (800) Fax (708)

87 Allied PVC Electrical Conduit Formerly Georgia Pipe PROPERTIES: Physical Properties ASTM Test Method Value Specific Gravity D Tensile Strength, 73.4 F D Impact (Izod) ft. lbs/in. of 73.4 F D Flexural Strength, psi D790 14,700 Compressive Strength, psi D695 9,000 Hardness (Shore D ) D Thermal Properties Heat Distortion in F at 264 psi D Thermal Conductivity BTU/F 2 / F/in. 1.3 Coefficient of Thermal Expansion in./in./ F at 73.4 F D x10-5 Coefficient of Thermal Expansion in./in./ C at 23 C D x10-5 Electrical Properties Dielectric Strength volts/mil D Dielectric Constant C C D Power Factor C C D EXPANSION/CONTRACTION CONSIDERATIONS Precautions to guard against expansion or contraction due to changes in the temperature should be taken. Expansion joints should be installed to eliminate stress caused by changes in length. Please see chart to determine possible expansion/contraction. Temperature, Rise or Drop, in Deg. Fahrenheit Change in Length of 10-Foot-Length in inches S. Lathrop Ave. Harvey, Illinois (708) (800) Fax (708)

88 Allied PVC Electrical Conduit Formerly Georgia Pipe CORROSION RESISTANCE OF ALLIED PVC CONDUIT Corrosion resistance data provided in the table below were based on laboratory tests conducted by the manufacturers. This information is not a guarantee and may only be used as a basis for recommendation. Acetic Acid 0-20% Acetic Acid 20-30% Acetic Acid 30-60% Acetic Acid 80% Acetic Acid Glacial Acetic Acid Vapors Acetylene Adipic Acid Alum Aluminum Chloride Aluminum Fluoride Aluminum Hydroxide Aluminum Oxychloride Aluminum Nitrate Aluminum Sulfate Ammonia Dry Gas Ammonium Bifloride Ammonium Carbonate Ammonium Chloride Ammonium Hydroxide 28% Ammonium Metaphosphate Ammonium Nitrate Ammonium Persuitate Ammonium Phosphate Neutral Ammonium Sulfate Ammonium Sulfide Ammonium Thiocyanate Amyl Alcohol Anthraquinoneasultonic Acid Antimony Trichloride Aqua Regia Arsenic Acid 80% Arvisulfonic Acid Barium Carbonate Barium Chloride Barium Hydroxide Barium Sulfate Barium Sulfide Beet Sugar Liquor Benzine Sulfonic Acid 10% Benzoic Acid Bismuth Carbonate Black Liquor (Paper Industry) Bleach 12.5% Active CL 2 Borax Boric Acid Brine Breeder Pellets Deriv. Fish Bromic Acid Bromine Water Butane Butadiene Butyl Alcohol Butyl Phenol Butylene Butyric Acid Calcium Bisulfite Calcium Carbonate Calcium Chlorate Calcium Chloride Calcium Hydroxide Calcium Hypocholrite Calcium Nitrate Calcium Sulfate Carbonic Acid Carbon Dioxide Gas Wet Carbon Dioxide Aqueous Solution Carbon Monoxide Caustic Potash Caustic Soda Chloracetic Acid Chloral Hydrate Chlorine Gas (Dry) Chlorine Gas (Moist) Chlorine Water Chlorosulfonic Acid Chrome Alum Chromic Acid 10% Chromic Acid 30% Chromic Acid 40% Chromic Acid 50% Citric Acid Copper Chloride Copper Cyanide Copper Fluoride Copper Nitrate Copper Sulfate Cottonseed Oil Cresylic Acid 50% Crude Oil Sour Crude Oil Sweet Demineralized Water Dextron Dextrose Diglycolic Acid Disodium Phosphate Ethyl Alcohol Ethylene Glycol Fatty Acids Ferric Chloride Ferric Nitrate Ferric Sulfate Ferrous Chloride Ferrous Sulfate Fluorine Gas Wet Fluorine Gas Dry Fluorobonic Acid Fluorosilic Acid Formaldehyde Formic Acid Fructose Gallic Acid Gas Coke Oven Gas Natural (Dry) Gas Natural (Wet) Gasoline Sour Gasoline Refined Glucose Glycerine (Glycerol) Glycol Glycotic Acid Green Liquor (Paper Industry) Heptane Hexanol Tertiary Hydrobromic Acid 20% Hydrochloric Acid 0-25% Hydrochloric 25-40% Hydrocyanic Acid or Hydrogen Cyanide Hydrofluoric Acid 10% Hydrofluorosilicic Acid Hydrogen Phosphide Hydrogen Sulfide Dry Hydrogen Sulfide Aqueous Solution Hydroquinone Hydroxylamine Sulfate Iodine Kerosene Lactic Acid 28% Lauric Acid Lauryl Chloride Lauryl Sulfate Lead Acetate Lime Sulfur Linoleic Acid Linseed Oil Lubricating Oils Magnesium Carbonate Magnesium Hydroxide Magnesium Nitrate Magnesium Sulfate Maleic Acid Malic Acid Mercuric Chloride Mercuric Cyanide Mercurous Nitrate Mercury Methyl Sulfate Methylene Chloride Mineral Oils Naphthalene Nickel Chloride Nickel Nitrate Nitric Acid. Anhydrous Nitric Acid 20% Nitric Acid 40% Nitric Acid 60% Nitrobenzene Nitrous Oxide Oils and Fats Oils Petroleum (See Type) Oleic Acid Oxalic Acid Palmitic Acid 10% Perchloric Acid 10% Phenylhydrazine Hydrochloride Phosgene Gas Phosphoric Acid 0-25% Phosphoric Acid 25-50% Phosphoric Acid 50-85% Photographic Chemicals Plating Solutions Potassium Bicarbonate Potassium Bichromate Potassium Borate Potassium Bromate Potassium Bromide Potassium Carbonate Potassium Chloride Potassium Chromate Potassium Cyanide Potassium Dichromate Potassium Ferricyanide Potassium Ferrocyanide Potassium Fluoride Potassium Hydroxide Potassium Nitrate Potassium Perborate Potassium Perchlorate Potassium Permanganate 10% Potassium Persulfate Propane Propyl Alcohol Silicic Acid Silver Cyanide Silver Nitrate Silver Plating Solutions Sodium Acetate Sodium Arsenite Sodium Benzoate Sodium Bicarbonate Sodium Bisulfate Sodium Bisulfite Sodium Bromide Sodium Chlorate Sodium Chloride Sodium Dichromate Sodium Ferricyanide Sodium Ferrocyanide Sodium Fluoride Sodium Hydroxide Sodium Hypochlorite Sodium Nitrate Sodium Nitrite Sodium Sulfate Sodium Sulfide Sodium Sulfite Sodium Thiosulfate (Hypo) Stannic Chloride Stannous Chloride Stearic Acid Sulfur Sulfur Dioxide Gas (Dry) Sulfur Trioxide Sulfuric Acid 0-10% Sulfuric Acid 10-75% Sulfuric Acid 75-90% Sulfurous Acid Tannic Acid Tanning Liquors Tartaric Acid Titanium Tetrachloride Triethanolamine Trimethylene Propane Trisodium Phosphate Turpentine Urea Vinegar Whiskey White Liquor (Paper Industry) Wines Zinc Chloride Zinc Chromate Zinc Cyanide Zinc Nitrate Zinc Sulfate S. Lathrop Ave. Harvey, Illinois (708) (800) Fax (708)

89 Allied PVC Electrical Conduit Formerly Georgia Pipe PALLET QUANTITIES AND TRUCKLOAD FORMATION Trade Sched-40 Size Wt/Ft Ft/Pallet Full Truck Loading Units ' 276,000' ' 206,800' ' 140,400' ' 102,300' ' 85,500' ' 56,000' ' 37,200' ' 28,160' ' 20,160' ' 18,240' ' 12,160' ' 8,320' Maximum Weight per Truckload: 45,000 Lbs. Maximum Loading Units per Truckload: Approx Units. PVC CONDUIT INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS 1. Cut sizes 1 /2" 1 1 /2" square using a fine tooth handsaw and deburr each end of conduit. For sizes 2"-6", a miter box, or similar saw guide should be utilized to keep material steady. 2. After cutting and deburring, wipe pipe ends clean of dust, dirt and shavings. Make sure both conduit and the coupling are clean and dry before any solvent cement is applied. 3. Apply coat of solvent cement to end of conduit to the length of socket to be attached. Wipe the excess cement left in brush to the inside of coupling. 4. Push conduit firmly into fitting while rotating conduit about one-quarter turn to spread cement evenly. Push and rotate conduit until the ends meet. 5. Allow cement to set until dry S. Lathrop Ave. Harvey, Illinois (708) (800) Fax (708)

90 Formerly Georgia Pipe Allied PVC Electrical Conduit LIMITED WARRANTY Limited Warranty. Seller only warrants to Buyer that the goods to be shipped hereunder will meet applicable Underwriter s Laboratory specifications. THE FOREGOING EXPRESS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER WRITTEN, ORAL OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SELLER HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY OTHER WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, WHETHER WRITTEN, ORAL OR IMPLIED, THAT THE GOODS SHALL CONFORM WITH ANY SAMPLES FURNISHED BY SELLER OR BUYER, OR THAT THE GOODS SHALL NOT DISCOLOR OR THE TEXTURE OR FINISH OF THE GOODS SHALL NOT DETERIORATE AFTER SHIPMENT BY SELLER. Solvent Weld Pipe Disclaimer for Both Standard and Non-Standard Products. Because Allied cannot be assured that solvent weld pipe will be installed by persons fully acquainted with the proper installation techniques involved and the limitations upon such techniques caused by variations installation conditions, Allied DOES NOT WARRANT AND WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE OR LIABLE FOR ANY EXPENSES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES WHATSOEVER CONNECTED WITH OR GROWING OUT OF OR CAUSED BY THE FAILURE OF ANY SOLVENT WELD JOINT OR BY DEFECTIVE SOLVENT USED IN MAKING ANY SUCH JOINT. This disclaimer does not apply to factory-made solvent welds. Remedy. If it appears within thirty (30) days from the date of receipt by Buyer or Buyer s agent that the goods shipped do not meet Seller s above express warranty and Buyer notifies Seller, in writing, within such period, Seller, at its option, will repair or replace such defective or nonconforming goods or return the purchase price paid therefore by Buyer. THE LIABILITY OF SELLER TO BUYER ARISING OUT OF THE SALE OF GOODS OR THEIR USE, WHETHER ON WARRANTY, CONTRACT OR NEGLIGENCE IS LIMITED ONLY TO THE REPLACEMENT OR REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE GOODS OR RETURN OF THE PURCHASE PRICE, AS HEREIN PROVIDED. AND UPON THE EXPIRATION OF SAID THIRTY (30) DAY PERIOD ALL SUCH LIABILITY SHALL TERMINATE. THE FOREGOING SHALL CONSTITUTE THE SOLE REMEDY OF THE BUYER AND THE SOLE LIABILITY OF SELLER. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SELLER BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Buyer shall bear all cost of disassembly, shipment and re-installment of any defective, repaired or replaced goods and shall return to Seller only upon written authorization of Seller, all goods for which refund of purchase price is made S. Lathrop Ave. Harvey, Illinois (708) (800) Fax (708)

91 Other Tyco Electrical and Metal Products CONDUIT Steel Rigid, EMT, IMC Kwik-Couple IMC/GRC Kwik-Fit EMT Fire Alarm EMT Blue EMT Aluminum Rigid, EMT Rigid and EMT Elbows and Couplings PVC Schedule-40 Schedule-80 POWER-STRUT FRAMING SYSTEMS Pre-Galvanized Channel Power-Gold Channel Hot-Dip Galv Channel Aluminum Channel Stainless Steel Channel Fiberglass Channel Power-Green Channel Strut Fittings Threaded Rod Junior Strut Junior Strut Fittings Fiberglass Fittings Concrete Inserts COPE CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS Aluminum Ladder Tray Aluminum Trof Fiberglass Tray Steel Trof Steel Ladder Tray CAT-Tray Wire Basket Centipede Center-Hung Tray Cope Channel AFC CABLE SYSTEMS AC & MC Cable AC-90 & AC-Lite Aluminum Armored Cable MC TUFF Lightweight Steel(MC) Home Run Cable Super Neutral Cable Conduit Fittings EMT Steel Compression and Set-Screw Liquid-Tight Metallic and Non-Metallic Fittings AFC Specialty Products Lighting, Power & Appliance Whips AFC/Uni-Fab Wiring Systems Temp-Lites HCF-90 Steel & HCF-Lite Aluminum Healthcare Facilites Cable Fire Alarm/Control Cable Parking Deck/Lot Cable Flexible Conduit LIQUID-TUFF Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit Full and Reduced Wall Flexible Conduit MC-IG Steel w/isolated Ground MC/OF Composite Copper & Optic Fiber Cable MOF Metal Clad Optical Fiber Cable

92 Wheatland Tube Company Wheatland Galvanized Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) -Steel General Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing is manufactured from mild steel tube. It has an accurate circular cross section, a uniform wall thickness, a defect free interior surface, and continuously welded seams. The exterior surface is thoroughly and evenly coated with zinc using an inline galvanizing process, so that metal-tometal contact and galvanic protection against corrosion are provided. Additionally, the exterior is protected by a clear zinc chromate coating. The interior surface is coated with organic lubricating coating to reduce friction during wire insertion and retard corrosion. Wheatland s EMT and its associated tubular fittings are produced in nominal trade sizes from 1/2 to 4. EMT is produced in standard lengths of 10 feet (3.05 m). Bundles of finished EMT are wrapped with color coded special light weight filament tape. Black tape identifies trade sizes 1/2 and 1 1/2, Red tape identifies 3/4 and 1 1/4, and Blue tape 1. Trade sizes 2 and larger are not bundled. Wheatland EMT is a UL Listed product. Each length of tubing has a label affixed containing UL Listing information and a bar code. Each length is identified with Wheatland s name, Logo, the letters EMT clearly and durably marked once per 10 foot (3.05 m) length, a U.L. listing number and the words, Consult manufacturer for installation instructions. On July 25, 2001 the past UL requirement to embed the letters EMT into the surface of the tube was changed to require only durably marking the tube with the letters EMT at a minimum of 1/8 inch (3 mm) high. Applications Wheatland Galvanized Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing, National Electrical Code (NEC ) 2002 Article 358, can be installed indoors or outdoors, in dry or wet locations, exposed or concealed, in all kinds of atmospheric conditions, and in hazardous locations, when in accordance with NEC 502.4, and and providing it will not be subject to sever physical damage during and after installation and is properly protected against corrosion. Also, it provides mechanical protection for the conductors while reducing Electro- Magnetic Field (EMF) exposure and shielding against Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI). Galvanized Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing is an approved equipment grounding conductor under the 2002 NEC Section (4). The NEC establishes the minimum requirements for a safe electrical installation. Because of the varied environments in which electrical equipment is installed, local amendments are often added. Always consult local codes prior to any installation. 900 Haddon Avenue Collingswood, NJ Specifications Wheatland Galvanized Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing is manufactured in accordance with the latest edition of the following: American National Standards Institute - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT), ANSI C80.3 Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing - Steel, UL 797 National Electric Code Article 358 (1999 NEC Article 348) Federal Specification - WW-C-563 The above Federal specification may still be referenced, however the federal government has canceled it and adopted the UL 767 and ANSI C80.3 standard and will no longer maintain a separate standard. Electrical Metallic Tubing was covered under WW-C-563. Additional information on the titles and designations of standards or requirements that have been used for the investigation of products in a specific category can be found in the Underwriters Laboratories Inc., General Information for Electrical Equipment Directory. The UL product category for EMT is FJMX. Made in U.S.A. Certificate Numbers: Wheatland, PA Chicago, IL Little Rock, AR EMT_Spec_Sheet_2002.p65

93 Wheatland Tube Company Electrical Metallic Tubing - Steel 900 Haddon Avenue Collingswood, NJ WEIGHTS AND DIMENSIONS Trade Size Metric Designator Weight 10 Unit Lengths Outside Diameter(1) Inside Diameter(2) Wall Thickness(2) lb k g in. m m in. m m in. mm 1 / / / / / / Notes : Applicable tolerances PACKAGING Length: 10 Ft. (3.05 m) +/- 1/4 in. (+/ mm) (1) Outside Diameter: 1/2-2 +/ in. ( /- 0.13mm), 2-1/2 +/ in. (63 +/ mm), 3 +/ in. (78 +/ mm), 3-1/2-4 +/ in. ( / mm). (2) For information only, not a UL 797 requirement. Trade Size Metric Designator Bundle Tape Color Quantity Per Bundle Quantity Per Lift Weight Per Lift Volume Per Lift Feet Meters Pieces Bundle s Feet Meters Pounds K ilograms Cu. Ft. Cu. m 1 / 2 16 Black / 4 21 Red Blue / 4 35 Red / 2 41 Black / / The quantity per Lift conforms to the National Electrical Manufacturers Association Standards Publication RN-2 Packaging of Master Bundles for Steel Rigid Conduit, Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC), and Electrical Metallic Tubing. EMT_Spec_Sheet_2002.p65

94 PVC Electrical Fittings & Accessories August 2008

95 PVC Electrical Fittings & Accessories Price List Revised 8/2008 Schedule 40 Fittings Couplings, Female Adapters,Terminal Adapters, Standard Radius Elbows PE and BE Schedule 40 & 80 Special Fittings Straps, Expansion Couplings, End Bells, Reducers, Plugs, Caps, Service Entrance Caps, Box Adapters, Sch. 40 Longline Cplgs, Sch. 40 Swedged Cplg., Pull Elbows, Meter Offsets, PVC Offsets, Strain Relief Connectors Schedule 40 Special Radius Elbows Plain End...15 Schedule 40 Special Radius Elbows Bell End...16 Conduit Bodies, Junction Boxes, Floor Boxes & Accessories Exposed Boxes and Weatherproof Covers Schedule 80 Standard Radius Elbows Plain End...24 Schedule 80 Special Radius Elbows Plain End...25 Schedule 40 Split Duct and Accessories Conduit Fittings for Type EB & DB Duct Elbows for Type EB & DB Duct Bell End Service Risers EZ GUARD Wild Life Protector Plastic Spacers for Duct Bending Equipment for PVC Conduit EZ-FLEX Electrical Nonmetallic Tubings...40 EZ Flex Electrical Nonmetallic Fittings / Nonmetallic Slab Boxes...41 ENT Non-Metallic Electrical Boxes...42 ENVIRO-FLEX Liquidtight Conduit...43 ENVIRO-FLEX Liquidtight Fittings...43 Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings, Solvent Cement for EZ-FLEX ENT...44 CANTEX Inc 301 Commerce Ste. 2700, Fort Worth, Texas Fax:

96 CANTEX PVC Electrical Products PVC PRODUCTS CANTEX PVC Products had its beginning over 40 years ago, as a division of a national corporation in the utility and building construction industry. The Plastics Division grew steadily in size and importance. Its product lines expanded into several major categories: Electrical distributors and contractors were provided with a broad line of PVC conduit and fittings. Power and utility companies were supplied with underground PVC duct and fittings. For the communications industry, PVC conduit and fittings were made available to telephone and cable companies for underground cable installations. Municipal public works needs were met with PVC pipe for distribution and collection. The commercial market need was fulfilled with PVC plumbing pipe. Because of its success in the PVC Products business, CANTEX caught the eye of an international organization which was planning for expansion into PVC Products in the Western Hemisphere. In February 1992, CANTEX was acquired by the respected Sumitomo Corporation, a multifaceted global business leader. Out of this acquisition the NEW CANTEX emerged, equipped with an intense philosophy of service to its customers and a renewed emphasis on product quality that targets the challenges of a new century. CANTEX is a leading producer of PVC Products, with eight manufacturing facilities located strategically from east to west across the country. These facilities feature some of the most modern production equipment and advanced process technology found anywhere in the industry. Production facilities include extrusion, injection molding, and fabrication processes to produce the broad lines of PVC Products which serve the power, utility, building construction, and communications markets. ELECTRICAL PRODUCT LINE CANTEX offers a complete line of extruded and injection molded electrical conduit, duct, fittings, accessories, switch and outlet boxes. Products include a full range of sizes in: Schedule 40 & 80 Conduit Electrical Fittings & Accessories Molded & Fabricated Forte-Duct Utility Duct NEMA TC-6 & 8 EB/DB ASTM DB-100 Duct Fittings & Accessories Elbows, Bends & Sweeps Standard & Special Radius EZ-FLEX Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing & Fittings ENVIRO-FLEX Liquidtight Conduit & Fittings Telephone Conduit Types B-C-D EZ BOX Wall and Ceiling Switch and Outlet Boxes Bending Equipment Cements SERVICE CANTEX stands for a commitment to service service that puts the customer first. We carry extensive inventories nationwide so that you get fast turnaround and complete shipments. Our efficient transportation system of hand-picked contract carriers, means on-time deliveries anywhere in the U.S. The CANTEX customer service team is staffed by professionals who provide immediate response and effective communications about orders and shipments. At the NEW CANTEX, WE WORK FOR THE CUSTOMER.

97 CANTEX PVC Electrical Products INDUSTRY ORGANIZATIONS CANTEX actively supports those organizations which set standards and promote professional practices in the electrical industry. These include NEMRA, NAED, NEMA, IAEI, IEEE, ASTM, along with other associations in the construction industry. QUALITY ASSURANCE CANTEX has a comprehensive quality control program to ensure compliance with industry standards established by Underwriters Laboratories, National Electrical Code, National Electrical Manufacturers Association, and the American Society for Testing and Materials. From virgin raw materials blended into compounds thru extrusion or injection molding to final inspection and testing of the finished product, the manufacturing process is monitored to make sure quality standards are met or exceeded. Each plant is graded and held accountable for the quality control performance of its total output. To further strengthen the company s goal for quality products, a centralized quality control review procedure assures that every plant is producing at a consistent level of quality for all similar products. You know you re getting the very best every time you buy from CANTEX. PVC ELECTRICAL STANDARDS BY PRODUCT Schedule 40 Conduit UL 651, NEMA TC-2 and NEC-Article 352 Schedule 80 Conduit UL 651, NEMA TC-2 and NEC-Article 352 Forte-Duct UL Schedule 40 Conduit UL 651, NEMA TC-2 and NEC-Article 352 PVC Electrical Fittings All fittings for electrical applications conform to NEMA TC-3 and UL 514B & UL651 Utility Duct NEMA TC-6&8, ASTM F-512, (Type EB20 UL 651A) Utility Duct Extra Strength NEMA TC-6&8, DB-100 and ASTM F-512 Utility Duct Fittings NEMA TC-9 EZ-FLEX ENT (Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing) & Fittings UL 1653, NEMA TC-13 and NEC Article 362 ENVIRO-FLEX Liquidtight Conduit UL1660 and NEC 356 ENVIRO-FLEX Liquidtight Fittings UL 514B, NEMA FB-1 and NEC 356 Uniform Product Code Bar Codes UPC-ITF Shipping container Bar Code to identity each standard Carton of Products using interleaved 2 of 5 Symbology. Packaging Level Number System Characters Manufacturer I.D. Number Item Number Check Digit

98 Schedule 40 & 80 Fittings Couplings Female Adapters PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / / * D PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / / * D Terminal Adapters PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / / * D * Not UL Listed

99 Schedule 40 Standard Radius Elbows 90 Elbows Plain End 45 Elbows Plain End 30 Elbows Plain End 22-1/2 Elbows Plain End PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / / * * PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / / * * PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / / * * PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / * * *Pallet quantities 7

100 Schedule 40 Standard Radius Elbows 90 Elbows Bell End 45 Elbows Bell End PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / / * * PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / / * * Elbows Bell End PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / * * /2 Elbows Bell End PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / * * *Pallet Quantities 8

101 Elbow Dimensions Plain End Bell End SIZE A B MIN B MIN C MIN 1/ /2 3/4 4 3/ /2 3/4 4-1/ /8 7/8 5-3/4 1 1/ /4 1 1/ /8 8-1/ /8 9-1/2 2 1/ /2 10-1/ /8 1-5/ / /4 1-3/ /8 1-3/ / /4 2-1/8 30 9

102 Schedule 40 & 80 Special Fittings Two-Hole Pipe Straps PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / Expansion Couplings One Piece PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / /2 through 3/4 2 through 3 Maximum Expansion 4 Maximum Expansion 6 1 through 1-1/2 3-1/2 through 4 Maximum Expansion 5 Maximum Expansion 7 Expansion Couplings Two Piece Expansion Couplings Two Piece w/molded Male Adapter PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / / /2 through 2 2 1/2 through 6 Maximum Expansion 4 Maximum Expansion 8 PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT /

103 Schedule 40 & 80 Special Fittings End Bells PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / / Reducers PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT /4 x 1/ x 3/ /4 x * /2 x 1-1/ * x 1-1/ * /2 x * x 2-1/ * x * x 3-1/ * CSA Listed Poly Plugs PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT Poly Plugs with Pulling Eye PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT

104 Schedule 40 & 80 Special Fittings Sch 40 Longline Coupling No Center Stop (Repair Coupling) (Fabricated) PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / Sch 40 Longline Coupling with Center Stop (Molded) PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / Sch 40 Swedged Coupling (Fabricated) PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT Sch 40 Split Sleeve Coupling (Fabricated) PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT End Bells (Fabricated) PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT D

105 Schedule 40 & 80 Special Fittings Caps PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / / Service Entrance Caps PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / / Box Adapters PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / * / * / * * CSA Listed 13

106 Schedule 40 & 80 Special Fittings Pull Elbows PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / Meter Offsets PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / PVC Offsets PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / Strain Relief Connectors PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / Threaded with lock nut and washer Includes 3 round and 3 oval grommets Sealing Washers Use with Terminal Adapters for Concrete Tight Connection PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / /

107 Schedule 40 Special Radius Elbows Plain End SIZE / / / / *8 BEND PART NUMBER DEGREE 18 RADIUS 24 RADIUS. 30 RADIUS 36 RADIUS 48 RADIUS 60 RADIUS / / / / / / Use Standard Radius /2 (15 ) Use Standard Radius /2 (16 ) Use Standard Radius (24 ) / Use Standard Radius (30 ) / D D D D 22-1/2 Note: (1) Orders for special radius elbows are noncancelable and nonreturnable. (2) Elbows are plain end. (3) Larger radius are available on request. (4) Other degree bends are available on request. * Not UL Rated 15

108 Schedule 40 Special Radius Elbows Belled End SIZE DEGREE BEND 18 RADIUS 24 RADIUS PART NO. 36 RADIUS 48 RADIUS / / 2 90 Use Standard Radius (15 ) Use Standard Radius (16 ) Use Standard Radius (24 ) Use Standard Radius (30 ) Note: (1) Orders for special radius elbows are non-cancelable and non-returnable. (2) Elbows belled one end. (3) Larger radius available on request. (4) Other degree bends available on request. 16

109 Conduit Bodies and Junction Boxes Type LB PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / / Type LL PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / / Type LR PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / /

110 Conduit Bodies and Junction Boxes Type T PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / / Type C PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / / Type E PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / /

111 Conduit Bodies and Junction Boxes Round Junction Box PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT /2 & 3/ Junction Boxes PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT. * x4x * x4x x4x x5x * x6x * x6x * x8x * x8x x8x x12x * x12x ** x14x x18x x24x x24x * CSA Listed ** UL Listed with only a Type 1 NEMA Rating Not UL Listed Duplex Boxes and Cover PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE / DESCRIPTION PKG WT Floor Box Base /4 Hubs, 4-3/4 to 1/2 Reducers, Level Ring & Pour Cover, U.L. Listed Floor Box Base /4 Hubs, 2-1 Hubs, 2-3/4 to 1/2 Reducers, 2-1 to 3/4 Reducers, Level Ring and Pour Cover. U.L. Listed Duplex Cover-BRONZE

112 Exposed Boxes Type FD-Blank PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT Type FSE PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / For damp and wet locations with approved cover. Two-Gang Type FSE PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / Type FSC PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / For damp and wet locations with approved cover. Two-Gang Type FSC PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / Type FSS PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / For damp and wet locations with approved cover. Two-Gang Type FSS PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / /

113 Exposed Boxes Type FSCC PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / For damp and wet locations with approved cover. Two-Gang Type FSCC PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / Type FDC Type FDE PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / For damp and wet locations with approved cover. PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / For damp and wet locations with approved cover. Weatherproof Box Covers Note: Self tapping screws included with all boxes Blank Cover PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT Two-Gang Blank Cover PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT

114 Weatherproof Box Covers Switch Cover PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT Wet locations when cover closed. Single Toggle Switch Cover PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT Wet locations when cover closed. Single Receptacle Cover PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT amp amp amp amp Description Hole Diameter 15 amp (1-3/8 ) 20 amp (1-5/8 ) 30 amp (1-23/32 ) 50 amp (1-3/16 ) GFI Receptacle Cover PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT Wet locations when cover closed. GFI & Toggle Switch Cover PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT Wet locations when cover closed. Duplex Receptacle Cover PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT Wet locations when cover closed. 22

115 Weatherproof Box Covers Double Toggle Switch Cover PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT Wet locations when cover closed. Duplex & Toggle Switch Cover PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO SIZE PKG WT Wet locations when cover closed. Double Duplex Receptacle Cover PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO SIZE PKG WT Wet locations when cover closed. Single Plunger Switch Cover PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT Wet locations when cover closed. In-Use Weatherproof Covers Single Gang In-Use PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. DEPTH PKG WT / / Wet locations when cover closed. Two Gang In-Use PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. DEPTH PKG WT / Wet locations when cover closed. 23

116 Schedule 80 Standard Radius Elbows 90 Elbows Plain End PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / * * Elbows Plain End PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / * * Elbows Plain End PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / * * * Pallet quantities 24

117 Schedule 80 Special Radius Elbows Plain End SIZE / / / DEGREE BEND PART NUMBER 18 RADIUS 24 RADIUS 36 RADIUS 48 RADIUS 60 RADIUS / / / / / / / / / Note: (1) Orders for special radius elbows are non-cancelable and non-returnable. (2) Larger radius available on request. (3) Other degree bends available on request. 25

118 Split Duct Allows repair of damaged conduit in existing installations. No cutting and splicing of cables saves time and money. Sch 40 Split Duct - 10 length PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE O.D. PKG WT. A52CAZS A52CEZS 2-1/ A52DAZS , A52DEZS 3-1/ A52EAZS A52FAZS A52GAZS RUS Listed Sch 80 Split Duct - 10 length PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE O.D. PKG WT. A53CAZS A53EAZS RUS Listed Type C Telephone Split Duct - 10 length PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE O.D. PKG WT. A94EAZS RUS Listed 26

119 Sch 40 Split Sweeps & Accessories Sch 40 Split Elbow (Fabricated) PART SIZE RADIUS UPC-ITF PKG. NO. (in.) SEGMENT (in.) WT S S S S S S S S S / S / S / S / Sch 40 Split Sleeve Coupling (Fabricated) PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT EB - DB Duct Split Sleeve Coupling (Fabricated) PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT Suggested Installation Instructions 1. Position one 10 section beneath the cable. 2. Cut another section in half, align with end of 10 section over the cable and snap into place. 3. Apply strap approximately 1 from each end of the 5 section. 4. Butt another 10 section tightly to the end of the 5 section over the cable, snap the sections together and apply a length of tape around both sections covering the butted joint. 5. Apply another strap approximately 1 beyond the taped joint. 6. Butt another 10 section tightly to the end of the 10 section under the cable. Tape the joint and apply a strap approximately 1 on both sides of the joint. 7. Repeat procedure for length of project. 27

120 Conduit Fittings for Type EB & DB Duct TC-6 Coupling with Center Stop (Fabricated) TC-6 Coupling with Center Stop (Molded) TC-6 Longline Sleeve Coupling (Fabricated) Sch 40 Longline Coupling with Center Stop (Molded) Female Adapters PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / Terminal Adapters PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / /

121 Conduit Fittings for Type EB & DB Duct 5 Coupling Bell to Plain End 5 Coupling Bell to Plain End Schedule 40 (Molded) PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT Coupling Bell to Bell PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / TC6 Swedged Reducer Bell to Plain End (Fabricated) PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT x x x TC6 Swedged Reducer Bell to Bell End (Fabricated) PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT x Sch 40 Swedged Reducer Bell to Plain End (Fabricated) PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT /2 x x x 2-1/ x x x

122 Conduit Fittings for Type EB & DB Duct Stoppers PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT. 304C04B D04B 4-1/ C05B C06B End Bells (Fabricated) TC-6 End Bells (Molded) Poly Plugs Poly Plugs with Pulling Eye Caps PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT D PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT ` PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / / / / / /

123 Belled End Elbows for Type EB & DB Duct - DB 60 HM SIZE DEGREE BEND 18 RADIUS 24 RADIUS 36 RADIUS 48 RADIUS 60 RADIUS 1 1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / Note: (1) Orders for special radius elbows are noncancelable and nonreturnable. (2) Elbows belled one end. (3) Other degree bends available on request. 31

124 Belled End Elbows for Type EB & DB Duct - DB120 HM SIZE BEND DEGREE PART NUMBER 18 RADIUS 24 RADIUS 36 RADIUS 48 RADIUS 60 RADIUS / / / / / / / / / / Note: (1) Orders for special radius elbows are noncancelable and nonreturnable. (2) Elbows belled one end. (3) Larger radius available on request. (4) Other degree bends available on request. 32

125 Expansion Couplings Fabricated Expansion Joint (Meter Riser) PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE DESCRIPTION PKG WT Exp Cplg w/terminal Adapter /2 Exp Cplg w/terminal Adapter Exp Cplg w/terminal Adapter Note: (1) Overall length 28 (2) Assembled from UL listed materials. (3) Other sizes available upon request. Service Risers CANTEX PVC Schedule 40 and 80 Service Risers provide permanent protection for underground services where they emerge from the ground to enter structures or enclosures. Formed from UL Listed CANTEX PVC Schedule 40 and 80 Conduit, these risers are resistant to impact, will not corrode, and eliminate shock hazards. Their use assures compliance with Article of the National Electrical Code. INCLUDES TERMINAL (MALE) ADAPTER CEMENTED AT TOP END. 7 Lengths. Rated for 90 C Cable. Schedule 40 PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / Schedule 80 PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT / Note: (1) Overall length 7 (84 ). (2) 2 size is stocking item. (3) Assembled from UL listed materials. (4) Other sizes available upon request. 33

126 Service Risers CANTEX PVC Schedule 40 and DB 120 Service Risers with a 45 bend provide permanent protection for underground services where they emerge from the ground. The 45 bend eliminates the cost, time and labor to install a separate elbow. Formed from UL Listed CANTEX Schedule 40 and DB-120 conduit that are resistant to impact and UV light, their use assures compliance with Article of the National Electrical Code. Risers (Hockey Sticks) PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE DESCRIPTION PKG WT DB SCH CANTEX PVC Schedule 80 Service Risers with a 45 bend provide permanent protection for underground services where they emerge from the ground. The 45 bend eliminates the cost, time and labor to install a separate elbow. Formed from UL Listed CANTEX Schedule 80 conduit that are resistant to impact and UV light, their use assures compliance with Article of the National Electrical Code. 34 Schedule 80 PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE DESCRIPTION PKG WT X 24 Radius w/60 Riser /2 45 X 24 Radius w/63.5 Riser X 24 Radius w/60 Riser X 24 Radius w/60 Riser /2 45 X 24 Radius w/80 Riser X 24 Radius w/80 Riser X 24 Radius w/80 Riser

127 EZ GUARD AVOID UNNECESSARY POWER OUTAGES Wildlife is a major cause of power interruptions that cost utility companies many extra manhours for emergency repairs and equipment replacement. These power outages can be prevented by installing the CANTEX EZ GUARD. The EZ GUARD covers the energized bushing of the line devices, protecting it from the curious critters. The EZ GUARD is certified for 25 KV use per IEEE Test 1656 and is UV resistant. The unique hinge and locking design make installation a snap and the guard is re-useable. Part Number For more information, contact your CANTEX Sales Representative. Carton Qty. Carton Weight UPC-ITF EZGUARD lbs CANTEX INC. 301 Commerce Suite 2700 Fort Worth, Texas Fax:

128 Vertical and Horizontal Interlocking Plastic Spacers for Duct Intermediate Spacers PIPE SIZE PART NO. SEPARATION 1 1 1/2 2 3 STD. PKG. PKG. WT. PART NO. STD. PKG. PKG. WT. PART NO. STD. PKG. PKG. WT. PART NO. STD. PKG PKG. WT. Base Spacers PIPE SIZE PART NO. SEPARATION 1 1 1/2 2 3 STD. PKG. PKG. WT. PART NO. STD. PKG. PKG. WT. PART NO. STD. PKG. PKG. WT. PART NO. STD. PKG PKG. WT. 36

129 Plastic Spacers for Duct Vertical and Horizontal Interlocking For completely enclosed and locked-in duct banks They snap together vertically for fast, secure field assembly. Only two components, base and intermediate, are needed. Banding is not necessary. With the Vertical-Lock spacer, ducts are accurately separated. Spacers lock firmly together, preventing separation while workman walk atop the bank. Alignment of the duct bank sections is relatively easy with this completely locked-in construction. To prevent the top tier from floating during encased burial, it is suggested that an intermediate spacer be used as a cap. Used in both EB and DB installations. Vertical and horizontal interlocking permits building a strong, locked-in duct bank. A wide baseplate provides solid support for heaviest loads. Intermediate and Base Spacer Dimensions NOMINAL SIZE 1 SEPARTATION 1-1/2 SEPARTATION 2 SEPARTATION 3 SEPARTATION R A C R A C R A C R A C Base Spacers provide a 3 separation between bottom row of ducts & trench floor, except for 4 x1, which is 1 3/4. 37

130 EZ BEND Induction* Bender Bending Equipment for PVC Conduit EZ-2X Conduit 1/2 thru Watts, 115 VAC PART PKG. Dimensions: NO. WT. 27½"(L) x 6½" (W) x 8" (H) * U.S. Patent Number: D347,231 EZ BEND Infrared Benders EZ-2 Conduit 1/2 thru Watts, 115 VAC PART PKG. Dimensions: 27"(L) x 6¾" (W) x 7¾" (H) NO. WT EZ-4P Conduit 1/2 thru 4 With "Powerdrive" and ARS-46 Adjustable Roller PART PKG. Stand. "Powerdrive" is motorized rotation of the NO. WT. PVC pipe Watts, 120 VAC Dimensions: 56"(L) x 8½" (W) x 13" (H) EZ-4 Conduit 1/2 thru 4 Without Powerdrive PART PKG Watts, 120 VAC NO. WT. Dimensions: 56"(L) x 8½" (W) x 13" (H) " EZ BEND is a registered trademark of Bradshaw Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved and is used with permission."

131 Bending Equipment for PVC Conduit EZ BEND Infrared Bender PART PKG. PRICE NO. WT. EACH , EZ-6P Conduit 1/2 thru 6 with Powerdrive Includes ARS-46 Adjustable Roller Stand. (ARS-46 is not pictured.) "Powerdrive" is motorized rotation of the PVC pipe Watts, 230 VAC Dimensions: 73"(L) x 11¾" (W) x 16½" (H) PART PKG. PRICE NO. WT. EACH , EZ-6 Conduit 1/2 thru Watts, 230 VAC Dimensions: 73"(L) x 11¾" (W) x 16½" (H) EZ BEND Bending Plugs PK-24 Small diameter kit 2 thru 4 Includes 3 pairs of plugs and sleeves. Comes in an organized carrying case. Kit dimensions: 8 x 9 1/2 x 17 PART PKG. NO. WT PK-46 Large diameter kit 4 thru 6 Includes 3 pairs of plugs and sleeves. Comes in an organized carrying case. Kit dimensions: 9 1/2 x 10 1/2 x 18 PART PKG. NO. WT PK-26 All diameter kit 2 thru 6 Includes 5 pairs of plugs and sleeves. Comes in an organized carrying case. Kit dimensions: 9 1/2 x 10 1/2 x 18 PART PKG. NO. WT " EZ BEND is a registered trademark of Bradshaw Mfg., Inc. All Rights Reserved and is used with permission." 39

132 EZ FLEX Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing Meets specifications: NEMA TC-13 and NEC Article 331. Suitable for use with 90 C conductors. CANTEX EZ-FLEX ENT is a high performance lower cost alternative to electrical metallic tubing. Non-conductive and corrosion resistant. EZ-FLEX not only costs less than metal tubing but installation time is dramatically reduced, saving expensive labor cost. Corrugated design allows bending by hand, eliminating the necessity of bending equipment and special tools. Reduced inner surface area cuts down on drag so that wire pulling is accomplished easier and faster. U.L. Listed EZ-FLEX is used in circuits of 600 volts or less. Minimum installation temperature is -4 F (-20 C) and maximum ambient temperature is 122 F (50 C). EZ-FLEX is made in electric blue color for easy identification. Straight Length-10 PART NO. SIZE PIECES PER PACK FEET PER PACK UPC-ITF 3 00 PKG88700 PACK WT. A51AE11 1/ A51AG11 3/ A51BA Coils PART NO. SIZE FEET PER COIL FEET PER PKG UPC-ITF 3 00 PKG88700 PKG WT. A51AEB1 1/ A51AGA1 3/ A51BAA Reels PART NO. SIZE FEET PER REEL UPC-ITF 3 00 PKG88700 PKG WT. (Weight of reel not included) A51AEQ1 1/ A51AEK1 1/ A51AGJ1 3/ A51BAJ Note: U.L. Listed longer lengths are available on request. 1/ and 3/ REELS OF RED AND YELLOW EZ FLEX ARE AVAILABLE

133 EZ FLEX Electrical Nonmetallic Accessories Couplings PART NO. SIZE STD. PKG. UPC-ITF PKG. WT / / Terminal Adapters Threaded PART NO. SIZE STD. PKG. UPC-ITF PKG. WT / / Terminal Adapters Snap In PART NO. SIZE STD. PKG. UPC-ITF PKG. WT / / Electrical Nonmetallic Slab Box ENT Slab Box with Knockouts PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. KNOCKOUTS PKG WT. ENS0507K 4 x 1/2 / 4 x 3/ ENS0500K 8 x 1/ ENT Slab Box with Connectors PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG NO. KNOCKOUTS PKG WT. ENS0507C 4 x 1/2 / 4 x 3/ ENS0500C 8 x 1/ ENT Stubby PART STD. UPC-ITF PKG. NO. SIZE PKG WT. EN050SBY 1/ EN075SBY 3/ EN100SBY

134 ENT Nonmetallic Electrical Boxes ENT Single Gang 18 Cubic Inch Gray box with 3 Knockouts for 1/2 and 3/4 ENT 4 x 2 1/4 x 3 1/16 PART NO. STD. PKG. UPC-ITF PKG. WT. EN18SB ENT Two Gang 22.5 Cubic Inch Gray box with 8 Knockouts for 1/2 ENT 4 square - 1 1/2 deep PART NO. STD. PKG. UPC-ITF PKG. WT. EN22DB ENT Two Gang Box 31.0 Cubic Inch Gray box with 8 Knockouts for 1/2 and 3/4 ENT 4 square - 2 1/8 deep PART NO. STD. PKG. UPC-ITF PKG. WT. EN31DB ENT Ceiling Box 20.3 Cubic Inch Black box with 8 Knockouts for 1/2 and 3/4 ENT 4 Diameter 2 1/16 Depth PART NO. STD. PKG. UPC-ITF PKG. WT. EN20CB NOTE: Not suitable for ceiling fan installation. ENT Ceiling Box w/bar Hanger 20.3 Cubic Inch PART NO. STD. PKG. Black box with 6 Knockouts for 1/2 and 3/4 ENT 4 Diameter 2 1/16 Depth Bar adjust 14 1/4 to 22 1/2 in length UPC-ITF PKG. WT. EN20CH

135 Enviro-Flex Liquidtight Conduit Liquidtight Non-metallic Flexible Conduit. Conforms to NEC Article 351 and UL Enviro-Flex gives complete environmental protection for exposed cable installations and is ideal for use with control and motor applications, machinery tools, moving machinery, console wire, transformer connections, outdoor lighting, air conditioning, heating systems and computer power distribution. Enviro-Flex offers advantages compared to metal conduit: INSTALLATION Enviro-Flex costs less to install. It is easy to cut with no jagged edges, is less than 1/2 the weight of metal and can utilize all existing liquidtight fittings. FLEXIBILITY Enviro-Flex is more flexible and its smooth inner bore makes pulling wires easier than ever. SERVICE ENVIRONMENT Enviro-Flex is waterproof, acid, oil, alkaline, and corrosion resistant. It is non-conductive, self-extinguishing, extremely resistant to crush, abrasion, and strain. UL listed for constant use at maximum 60 C (140 F) and for sunlight resistance. Coils PART NO. SIZE FEET PER COIL UPC-ITF WEIGHT PER COIL V06ADA1 3/ V06AEA1 1/ V06AGA1 3/ V06BAA V06BCN1 1 1/ V06BEN1 1-1/ V06CAN Reels Straight Connectors 90 Angle Connectors Flexible Elbows PART FEET UPC-ITF WEIGHT SIZE NO. PER COIL PER REEL V06AEJ1 1/ V06AGM1 3/ V06BAD PART FEET UPC-ITF WEIGHT SIZE NO. PER COIL PER COIL / / / / / PART FEET UPC-ITF WEIGHT SIZE NO. PER COIL PER COIL / / / / / PART FEET UPC-ITF WEIGHT SIZE NO. PER COIL PER COIL / /

136 Solvent Cement for Conduit and Fittings Conduit Cement No. 99 Conduit Cement No. 99 Low VOC Conduit Cement Gray PART NO. PART NO. SIZE SIZE STD. PKG. STD. PKG. UPC-ITF UPC-ITF PKG. WT /2 Pint Pint Quart Gallon PART NO. SIZE STD. PKG. UPC-ITF PKG. WT /2 Pint Pint Quart Gallon PKG. WT Pint Quart Conduit Cement All Weather Fast-Dry PART NO. SIZE STD. PKG. UPC-ITF PKG. WT /2 Pint Pint Quart Primer No. 10 PART NO. SIZE STD. PKG. UPC-ITF PKG. WT /2 Pint Pint Quart Gallon ESTIMATED SOLVENT REQUIREMENT PER 1,000 FEET: IN QUARTS One Weld per 20 Feet Pipe Size 1/2 3/ /4 1 1/ / Cement 1/2 1/2 1/ /2 1 1/ /2 4 Primer 1/2 1/2 1/ /2 1 1/ /2 4 Solvent Cement for EZ-FLEX ENT ENT No. 50 CEMENT PART NO. SIZE STD. PKG. UPC-ITF PKG. WT Pint Quart

137 MC MC TUFF Lightweight Steel Metal Clad Cable (120 Volt colors) Technical Specifications Specification Description Specification Armor Conductors Conductor Insulation Assembly Covering Maximum Temperature Rating Grounding Neutral Conductor Maximum Voltage Rating MC-TUFF ColorSpec ID System Galvanized Interlocking Steel Strip (blue striped) Solid/Stranded Copper (see below) THHN/THWN (XHHW available by special order subject to lead time and minimum quantities) Polypropylene Tape 90 C (dry) One grounding means Insulated Green Grounding Conductor White 600V References & Ratings Galvanized Steel Armor U.L. 83, 1479, 1569, 1581, (Color-Coded Blue) File Reference E80042 NEC , (C), 392, 396, 330, 518, 520, 530, 645 Federal Specification A-A (formerly J-C-30B) Meets all applicable OSHA and HUD Requirements May be surface mounted, fished and/or embedded in plaster Cable Tray installations per NEC U.L. Classified 1, 2 and 3-hour Through-Penetration Fire Wall File R Environmental Air-Handling Space installation AFC s ColorSpec ID System Additional black stripe denotes 2 conductor cable Additional black and red stripe denotes 3 conductor cable Additional black, red and light blue stripes denote 4 conductor cable Product Codes, Trade Sizes, Conductors, Packaging & Weights Grounding Approx. Armor Product Code Conductor Length (feet) Weight/1000 Minimum Coil Reel Trade Size AWG Coil Reel Feet (lbs.) O.D. (inches) 1701B42T B60T Solid ' 1000' B42T B60T Solid ' 1000' B42T B60T Solid ' 1000' B42T B60T Solid ' 1000' B42T B60T Solid ' 1000' B42T B60T Solid ' 1000' B42T B60T Stranded ' 1000' B42T B60T Stranded ' 1000' B42T B60T Stranded ' 1000' B32T Solid ' B32T Solid ' B32T Solid ' B42T B60T Solid ' 1000' B42T B60T Solid ' 1000' B42T B60T Solid ' 1000' B32T Stranded ' B32T Stranded ' B32T Stranded ' B42T B60T Stranded ' 1000' B42T B60T Stranded ' 1000' B42T B60T Stranded ' 1000' Specialty Colors 1704B42T B60T Solid (red, white) ' 1000' B42T B60T Solid (blue, white) ' 1000' B42T B60T Solid (red, blue, white) ' 1000' B42T B60T Solid (black, blue, white) ' 1000' B42T B60T Solid (red, white) ' 1000' B42T B60T Solid (blue, white) ' 1000' B42T B60T Solid (red, blue, white) ' 1000' B42T B60T Solid (black, blue, white) ' 1000' NOTE: All dimensions and weights are subject to normal manufacturing tolerances. WARNING: DO NOT RE-IDENTIFY CONDUCTOR COLORS. Assembly Tape Copper Conductors Copper Ground Nylon Thermoplastic THHN Insulation Additional red and white stripes denote special 2 conductor cable Additional light blue and white stripes denote special 2 conductor cable Additional red, light blue and white stripes denote special 3 conductor cable Additional black, light blue and white stripes denote special 3 conductor cable SET SCREW CONNECTORS MAY BE USED WITH STEEL CABLES, SEE CONNECTOR CROSS-REFERENCE GUIDE PAGE 30 FOR DETAILS AFC Cable Systems

138 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page ii Arlington Industries, Inc / FAX 570/ THEWIDEST CABLE RANGES FOR FLEX AC MC HCF MCI-A CABLE! See Pages E-1 to E-4 38AST Catalog Nos. 3810AST, AST, 38AST, 38A, 380ST, 380AST, 3838AST, 3890AST CABLE TYPE MC/HCF Cable Steel and Aluminum AC/HCF Cable Steel and Aluminum MCI-A (MC AP Cable) 3810AST & AST MCI-A (HCF MC AP Cable) 3810AST & AST Flexible Metal Conduit Steel and Aluminum (Regular and Reduced Wall) MC Cable Continuous Corrugated Aluminum CABLE RANGE 14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, 10/2 14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, 10/2 3/8" Trade Size CSA Only - Use Anti-Short Bushing 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, 10/2 40AST Catalog Nos. 4010AST, AST, 40AST, 400AST, 4040AST, 4090AST CABLE TYPE MC/HCF Cable Steel and Aluminum AC/HCF Cable Steel and Aluminum CABLE RANGE 14/2 w/gr.,14/4, 12/2 w/gr.,12/3, 12/3 w/gr., 10/2 w/gr., 10/3 MCI-A (MC AP Cable) 4010AST & AST MCI-A (HCF MC AP Cable) 4010AST & AST Flexible Metal Conduit Steel and Aluminum (Regular and Reduced Wall) MC Cable Continuous Corrugated Aluminum 12/2, 12/3, 12/4 10/2, 10/3, 10/4 3/8" Trade Size CSA Only - Use Anti-Short Bushing 14/4, 12/2 w/gr.,12/3, 12/4, 10/2 w/gr., 10/3 45AST Catalog Nos. 45AST, 50AST, 5090AST CABLE TYPE MC/HCF Cable Steel and Aluminum AC/HCF Cable Steel and Aluminum CABLE RANGE 45AST 50AST, 5090AST 10/3 to 6-2 8/3 to 4-2 Flexible Metal Conduit Steel and Aluminum (Regular and Reduced Wall) 1/2" Flex For overlapping cable ranges, use the larger fitting for easier cable insertion R R 50AST No Tools Required to Install Saves Time and Money Easy to Remove PATENTED/PATENTS PENDING. Flex AC MC MC AP and HCF MC AP are registered trademarks of the Southwire Company.

139 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page 1 R R R R sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ Arlington Industries, Inc. SNAP 2 IT Connectors Zinc die-cast. For MC/HCF steel and aluminum cable AC/HCF steel and aluminum cable Flexible metal conduit steel and aluminum (regular and reduced wall) MC cable continuous corrugated aluminum. 38AST CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C D RANGE 38AST* /8 1/ A* /8 1/ ST /8 1/ AST* /8 1/ AST* /2 1/ *Provided with insulated throat. D 38AST C A E18304 LR A 38AST 380AST With Insulated Throat and Red Tinted Inside Clip CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C D RANGE 40AST /8 1/ AST /8 1/ AST /2 1/ Refer to chart on page E-25 for a list of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. Flexible metal conduit, CSA listed with anti-short bushing (UL not applicable). SNAP-TITE and SNAP 2 IT products have been tested and listed by UL in accordance with UL s ground fault requirements. For additional information see page 6. PATENTED. ADDITIONAL PATENTS PENDING. B E18304 LR AST FOR EASIER MC/AC INSTALLATIONS... See 3810AST & 4010AST on Page E-2 NO TOOLS! Safe and fast installations Saves about 17 seconds per fitting! Competitively priced SNAP 2 IT Connectors are EASY to Install... COMPARE... Just snap onto cable and snap into box! And EASY to Remove... Using a screwdriver, lift the ring and twist off. RED TINTING means OPEN TANG Design! It gives you more room inside the fitting for easy insertion of wires. The redesigned front end makes it easier than ever to snap the fitting into box! 38AST 40AST E-1 Flex AC MC

140 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page 2 R R Arlington Industries, Inc. sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ SNAP 2 IT Connectors with Insulated Throat Zinc die-cast. For MC/HCF steel and aluminum cable AC/HCF steel and aluminum cable Flexible metal conduit steel and aluminum (regular and reduced wall) MC cable continuous corrugated aluminum MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable. New! CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C D RANGE 3810AST /8 1/ AST /8 1/ Provided with red tinted inside clip so you can differentiate a 3810AST from a 4010AST. Refer to chart on page E-25 for a list of cable types. Refer to chart on page E-26 for MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable ranges. D Concrete tight when taped. SNAP-TITE and SNAP 2 IT products have been tested and listed by UL in accordance with UL s ground fault requirements. For additional information see page 6. PATENT PENDING. B A C E18304 LR AST Easy cable insertion Tight, secure hold! 4010AST Features and Benefits Installs as fast and costs the same as our other SNAP 2 IT fittings, but cable insertion is even easier! Simply snap the cable into the fitting and snap it into the box... no tools needed! The screw only holds the clip in place. Widest cable ranges accommodates cable from 14/2 to 10/4. Super-secure the angled, two-prong clip locks down on MC cable so there s no chance of pullout. Cable is removable. Simply loosen the screw on top. FOR THE WIDEST TOTAL CABLE RANGES Back View Note angled, two-prong clip Top View Clip holds cable firmly in place Flex AC MC E-2 MC AP and HCF MC AP are registered trademarks of the Southwire Company.

141 LngfrdE.2 9/11/07 12:14 AM Page 3 R R R R sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ Arlington Industries, Inc. SNAP 2 IT Duplex Connectors with Insulated Throat Zinc die-cast. For MC/HCF steel and aluminum cable AC/HCF steel and aluminum cable Flexible metal conduit steel and aluminum (regular and reduced wall) MC cable continuous corrugated aluminum MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable. New! CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C D RANGE AST /8 1/ (2) AST /8 1/ (2) Provided with red tinted inside clips so you can differentiate a AST from a AST. Refer to chart on page E-25 for a list of cable types. Refer to chart on page E-26 for MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable ranges. Concrete tight when taped. SNAP-TITE and SNAP 2 IT products have been tested and listed by UL in accordance with UL s ground fault requirements. For additional information see page 6. PATENT PENDING. B A C D AST E18304 LR AST Secure hold Easy cable insertion! Simply snap the cable into the fitting and snap it into the box...no tools needed! The screw only holds the clip in place. FOR THE WIDEST TOTAL CABLE RANGES SNAP 2 IT Duplex Connectors Zinc die-cast. For MC/HCF steel and aluminum cable AC/HCF steel and aluminum cable Flexible metal conduit steel and aluminum (regular and reduced wall) MC cable continuous corrugated aluminum. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C D RANGE 3838ST /8 1/ (2) AST* /8 1/ (2) AST /8 1/ (2) *Provided with insulated throat. Provided with insulated throat and red tinted inside clips. See comparison on page E-1. Refer to chart on page E-25 for a list of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. SNAP-TITE and SNAP 2 IT products have been tested and listed by UL in accordance with UL s ground fault requirements. For additional information see page 6. PATENTED. ADDITIONAL PATENTS PENDING. B A C D FOR EASIER MC/AC INSTALLATIONS... See AST & AST Above E18304 LR49636 No Tools Required... Fully Assembled! Snap cables into connector and snap assembly into box or fixture. MC AP and HCF MC AP are registered trademarks of the Southwire Company. E-3 Flex AC MC

142 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page 4 R R Arlington Industries, Inc. sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ Zero to 90 SNAP 2 IT Connectors with Insulated Throat Zinc die-cast. For MC/HCF steel and aluminum cable AC/HCF steel and aluminum cable Flexible metal conduit steel and aluminum (regular and reduced wall) MC cable continuous corrugated aluminum. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C D RANGE 3890AST /8 1/ AST /8 1/ AST /2 1/ Provided with red tinted inside clip. See comparison on page E-1. Refer to chart on page E-25 for a list of cable types. B Concrete tight when taped. SNAP-TITE and SNAP 2 IT products have been tested and listed by UL in accordance with UL s ground fault requirements. For additional information see page 6. PATENTED. ADDITIONAL PATENTS PENDING. A C E18304 LR49636 D Adjusts for ALL ANGLES... from 0 to 90! TM Installation Instructions Saves over a minute on installation per connector when compared with a traditional locknut fitting! Snap cable into fitting until it stops. Rotate cable clockwise to lock in place. Loosen nut to adjust angle of fitting. Wires bend automatically without crimping or damage to wire. Tighten nut. Snap assembly into the KO. Flex AC MC E-4

143 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page 5 R R R R sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ Arlington Industries, Inc. Take All Connectors Single screw saddle type. For NM Flex AC MC steel and aluminum jacketed cables. Zinc die-cast. L15A L16 New! CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE END STOP NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE DIAMETER L15A* /8 1/ x.430 L /8 1/ x.580 L /8 1/ L /2 1/ L /4 3/ L *Provided with insulated throat. Listed for flexible cord. Also for MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable. Refer to page E-26 for cable ranges. Refer to chart on page E-25 for a list of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. A A PATENTED. ADDITIONAL PATENTS PENDING B B E20643 LR49636 C C L15A L160 L17 - L19 L15A L16 Take All SNAP-TITE Connectors With spring steel clip. Single screw saddle type. For NM Flex AC MC steel and aluminum jacketed cables. Zinc die-cast. L15AST L16ST New! CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE END STOP NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE DIAMETER L15AST* /8 1/ x.430 L16ST /8 1/ x.580 L160ST /8 1/ L17ST /2 1/ L18ST /4 3/ L19ST *Provided with insulated throat. Listed for flexible cord. Also for MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable. Refer to page E-26 for cable ranges. Refer to chart on page E-25 for a list of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. SNAP-TITE products have been tested and listed by UL in accordance with UL s ground fault requirements. For additional information see page 6. PATENTED. ADDITIONAL PATENTS PENDING. E18304 LR49636 B A B A C C L15AST L160ST L17ST - L19ST L15AST - L16ST L17ST - L19ST MC AP and HCF MC AP are registered trademarks of the Southwire Company. E-5 Flex AC MC

144 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page 6 R R Arlington Industries, Inc. sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ Steel Cable Hangers For Flex MC AC HCF cable. One-piece, galvanized steel cable hangers mount many ways on a variety of surfaces. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # PKG PKG A B C D CAPACITY SMC SMC SMC4F PATENT PENDING. E LR49636 A A A SMC8 SMC4F SMC4 Features and Benefits Saves money...use SMC steel hangers in place of cable tray Each cable is held in place independently, so there s no bundling of cables or derating of conduit Accepts a wide range of cables Mounts on concrete block walls or ceilings and screw mounts on metal or wood studs SMC4F also mounts on drop wire Attach with beam clamp, threaded rod, or with screws Meets NEC 2005 paragraphs (A,B,C), (A,B,C), and (A,B). Listed to position, support, and secure 14/2 to 10/4 cables as required by NEC Available in three styles to secure 14/2-10/4 cables: SMC8 holds up to 8 cables SMC4 holds up to 4 cables SMC4F mounts flat holds up to 4 cables on one side Stacks! Mounts in Many Ways! SMC8 supports and FIRMLY SECURES up to eight cables to comply with NEC Installation Instructions D B C SMC4 SMC4F shown D B C SMC8 Need photo of SMC4F in use D B C SMC4F SMC4F Insert screwdriver through slot. Bend tab over cable, locking it securely in place. Flex AC MC E-6

145 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page 7 R R R R sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ Arlington Industries, Inc. Set-Screw Connectors For steel only Flex AC MC cable. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE /8 1/ R /8 1/ Refer to chart on page E-24 for a list of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. Not suitable for aluminum jacketed cables or aluminum flexible metal conduit. E18304 LR49636 B R C A Set-Screw SNAP-TITE Connectors With spring steel clip. For steel only Flex AC MC cable. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE 845ST /8 1/ Refer to chart on page E-24 for a list of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. Not suitable for aluminum jacketed cables or aluminum flexible metal conduit. SNAP-TITE products have been tested and listed by UL in accordance with UL s ground fault requirements. For additional information see page 6. PATENTED. E10834 LR49636 C B A E-7 Flex AC MC

146 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page 8 R R R Arlington Industries, Inc. sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ Twin Screw All-Purpose Connector For Flex AC MC NM cable. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM CABLE END STOP NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B RANGE DIAMETER /8 1/ Refer to chart on page E-24 for a list of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. A LR49636 E B The Allows you to securely hold cables in low profile height fixtures with 1/4" knockouts. Fits both standard round 1/4" KO (17/32" diameter) and 5/8" diameter KO with flats. Is furnished with 1/4-18 n.p.s. fixture nut for easy tightening. Is recommended for use with non-metallic sheathed cable, AC, flexible metal conduit, MC cable both steel and aluminum jacketed. Is primarily for use with low silhouette undercabinet fluorescent fixtures. Normally only one fitting is supplied with lighting fixtures. Additional connectors are needed when multiple fixtures are wired in-line. Twin Screw All-Purpose Connectors For Flex AC MC NM cable. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE END STOP NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE DIAMETER /2 1/ /4 3/ /4 1-1/ Refer to chart on page E-24 for a list of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. Add suffix A to catalog number for insulated throat. A E60812 LR49636 C B Flex AC MC E-8

147 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page 9 R R R R sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ Arlington Industries, Inc. Cable Connectors AC MC NM SE. Zinc die-cast CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE END STOP NUMBER MFG # SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE DIAMETER / x / / / * * / * / * * / * * / *Listed for MC only. UL# E Also for MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable. Refer to page E-26 for cable ranges. Refer to chart on page E-24 for a list of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. A E28474 LR49636 C B SNAP-TITE Connectors With spring steel clip. Zinc die-cast. For NM SE MC Flex AC steel and aluminum jacketed cables MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE END STOP NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE DIAMETER 840ST /8 1/ x ST /8 1/ Refer to chart on page E-24 for a list of cable types. Refer to chart on page E-26 for MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable ranges. Concrete tight when taped. SNAP-TITE products have been tested and listed by UL in accordance with UL s ground fault requirements. For additional information see page 6. A PATENTED. E20643 LR49636 C 840ST 840ST 8400ST B 8400ST MC AP and HCF MC AP are registered trademarks of the Southwire Company. E-9 Flex AC MC

148 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page 10 R R R R Arlington Industries, Inc. sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ Squeeze Connectors For Flex AC MC cable. Zinc die-cast. L42 L421 CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE END STOP NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE DIAMETER L /8 1/ L420* /8 1/ x.580 L /2 1/ L /4 3/ L L /4 1-1/ L /2 1-1/ L L /2 2-1/ L L /2 3-1/ L *L420 not listed for flexible metal conduit. Refer to chart on page E-23 for a list of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. C E60812 LR49636 L420 L42 B A L427 Sizes 3/8" - 2" are manufactured as shown above. Sizes 2-1/2" - 4" are manufactured as shown above. Squeeze Connectors with Insulated Throat For Flex AC MC cable. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE END STOP NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE DIAMETER L421A /2 1/ L422A /4 3/ L423A L424A /4 1-1/ L425A /2 1-1/ L426A L427A /2 2-1/ L428A L429A /2 3-1/ L4210A Refer to chart on page E-23 for a list of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. C E60812 LR49636 B A Sizes 3/8" - 2" are manufactured as shown above. Sizes 2-1/2" - 4" are manufactured as shown above. Flex AC MC E-10

149 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page 11 R R R R R R sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ Arlington Industries, Inc. Duplex Connector Zinc die-cast. Single screw for Flex AC MC NM cable MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C D RANGE /8 1/ Refer to chart on page E-24 for a list B of cable types. Refer to chart on page E-26 for MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable ranges. C Concrete tight when taped. D A E60812 LR49636 Duplex SNAP-TITE Connectors Single screw for Flex AC MC NM cable. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C D RANGE 846ST /8 1/ AST* /8 1/ *Provided with insulated throat. Also for MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable. B Refer to page E-26 for cable ranges. Refer to chart on page E-24 for a list C of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. D SNAP-TITE products have been tested A and listed by UL in accordance with UL s ground fault requirements. For additional information see page 6. PATENTED. E60812 LR49636 Duplex Connector Twin screw with steel strap. Zinc die-cast. For Flex NM AC MC steel and aluminum jacketed cables. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C D RANGE 846SS /8 1/ Refer to chart on page E-24 for a list D of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. C E60812 LR49636 B A MC AP and HCF MC AP are registered trademarks of the Southwire Company. E-11 Flex AC MC

150 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page 12 R R R R R R Arlington Industries, Inc. sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ Duplex Connector Zinc die-cast. Twin screw for Flex NM AC MC steel and aluminum jacketed cables MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C D RANGE /8 1/ Refer to chart on page E-24 for a list of cable types. Refer to chart on page E-26 for MCI-A B (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable ranges. Concrete tight when taped. E60812 LR49636 C A D 90 Duplex SNAP-TITE Connector Zinc die-cast. Twin screw for NM Flex AC MC steel and aluminum jacketed cables MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C D RANGE 84690ST /8 1/ Refer to chart on page E-24 for a list of cable types. B Refer to chart on page E-26 for MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable ranges. Concrete tight when taped. SNAP-TITE products have been tested A and listed by UL in accordance with UL s ground fault requirements. D For additional information see page 6. PATENTED. C E20643 LR49636 Set-Screw Connectors For Flex AC MC cable. Zinc die-cast. Not for use with aluminum jacketed cables. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE END STOP NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE DIAMETER L /2 1/ L /4 3/ Refer to chart on page E-24 for a list of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. C E18304 LR49636 B A Flex AC MC E-12 MC AP and HCF MC AP are registered trademarks of the Southwire Company.

151 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page 13 R R R R sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ Arlington Industries, Inc. SADDLEGRIP Connectors For aluminum and steel Flex AC MC cable. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE END STOP NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE DIAMETER SG /8 1/ SG38A* /8 1/ SG /8 1/ x.580 SG380A* /8 1/ x.580 SG /16 1/ SG /2 1/ SG50A* /2 1/ SG /4 3/ SG75A* /4 3/ *Provided with insulated throat. Also for MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable. Refer to page E-26 for cable ranges. Refer to chart on page E-25 for a list of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. SG380 SG38 B For cables smaller than.405" see L16 A and L16ST on page E-5. C E60812 LR49636 Duplex SADDLEGRIP Connectors Zinc die-cast. For aluminum and steel Flex AC MC cable MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE SG /8 1/ (2) SG3838A* /8 1/ (2) *Provided with insulated throat. Refer to chart on page E-24 for a A list of cable types. Refer to chart on page E-26 for MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable ranges. C Concrete tight when taped. With independent securing of the cables, B you can use two different size cables. E60812 LR49636 MC AP and HCF MC AP are registered trademarks of the Southwire Company. E-13 Flex AC MC

152 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page 14 R R R R Arlington Industries, Inc. sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ SADDLEGRIP SNAP-TITE Connectors For aluminum and steel Flex AC MC cable. Zinc die-cast. SG38AST CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE END STOP NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE DIAMETER SG38AST* /8 1/ SG380AST* /8 1/ x.580 SG50ST /2 1/ SG50AST* /2 1/ SG75ST /4 3/ SG75AST* /4 3/ *Provided with insulated throat. Also for MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable. Refer to page E-26 for cable ranges. Refer to chart on page E-25 for a list of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. For cables smaller than.405" see L16 and L16ST on page E-5. SNAP-TITE products have been tested and listed by UL in accordance with UL s ground fault requirements. For additional information see page 6. PATENTED. C E60812 LR49636 SG380AST SG380AST SG38AST B A Duplex SADDLEGRIP SNAP-TITE Connectors Zinc die-cast. For aluminum and steel Flex AC MC cable MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE SG3838ST /8 1/ (2) SG3838AST* /8 1/ (2) *Provided with insulated throat. Refer to chart on page E-24 for a list of cable types. Refer to chart on page E-26 for MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable ranges. Concrete tight when taped. With independent securing of the cables, you can use two different size cables. SNAP-TITE products have been tested and listed by UL in accordance with UL s ground fault requirements. For additional information see page 6. PATENTED. A E60812 LR49636 C B Flex AC MC E-14 MC AP and HCF MC AP are registered trademarks of the Southwire Company.

153 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page 15 R R R R R R sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ Arlington Industries, Inc. 45 Connectors For aluminum and steel Flex AC MC cable. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE END STOP NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE DIAMETER /8 1/ /2 1/ Refer to chart on page E-24 for a list of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. C E60812 LR49636 B A 45 SNAP-TITE Connectors With spring steel clip. For aluminum and steel Flex AC MC cable. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE END STOP NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE DIAMETER 4501ST /8 1/ ST /2 1/ Refer to chart on page E-24 for a list of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. C SNAP-TITE products have been tested and listed by UL in accordance with UL s ground fault requirements. For additional information see page 6. PATENTED. A B E60812 LR SNAP-TITE Connectors With spring steel clip. For aluminum and steel Flex AC MC cable. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE 850ST /8 1/ AST* /8 1/ ST /2 1/ AST* /2 1/ *Provided with insulated throat. Also for MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable. Refer to page E-26 for cable ranges. Refer to chart on page E-23 for a list of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. SNAP-TITE products have been tested and listed by UL in accordance with UL s ground fault requirements. For additional information see page 6. PATENTED. B A CABLE RANGE C E60812 LR49636 MC AP and HCF MC AP are registered trademarks of the Southwire Company. E-15 Flex AC MC

154 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page 16 R R R R R R Arlington Industries, Inc. sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ Connectors For aluminum and steel Flex AC MC cable. Zinc die-cast. New! CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE /8 1/ A* /8 1/ *Provided with insulated throat. Also for MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable. A Refer to page E-26 for cable ranges. Refer to chart on page E-24 for a list of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. PATENT PENDING. B C E60812 LR49636 CABLE RANGE 90 SNAP-TITE Connectors With spring steel clip. For aluminum and steel Flex AC MC cable. Zinc die-cast. New! CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE 85ST /8 1/ AST* /8 1/ *Provided with insulated throat. Also for MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable. Refer to page E-26 for cable ranges. Refer to chart on page E-24 for a list of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. SNAP-TITE products have been tested and listed by UL in accordance A with UL s ground fault requirements. For additional information see page 6. PATENT PENDING. C B E60812 LR49636 CABLE RANGE Screw-On Snap-In Connectors Spring steel clip with nonmetallic body. Screws onto 3/8" Flex. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B GFSC /8 1/ GFSC38B /8 1/ For flexible metal conduit only. A B E60812 LR49636 Snaps into KO with 50% less force! Flex AC MC E-16 MC AP and HCF MC AP are registered trademarks of the Southwire Company.

155 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page 17 R R R R sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ Arlington Industries, Inc. 90 Connectors For aluminum and steel Flex AC MC cable. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE /8 1/ /2 1/ /4 3/ /4 1-1/ /2 1-1/ /2 2-1/ /2 3-1/ Malleable. Also for MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable. Refer to page E-26 for cable ranges. Refer to chart on page E-23 for a list of cable types A A Concrete tight when taped. C B C B E18304 LR49636 CABLE RANGE CABLE RANGE 90 Connectors with Insulated Throat For aluminum and steel Flex AC MC cable. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C RANGE 850A /8 1/ A /2 1/ A /4 3/ A A /4 1-1/ A /2 1-1/ A A /2 2-1/ A A /2 3-1/ A Malleable. Also for MCI-A (MC AP and HCF MC AP ) cable. Refer to page E-26 for cable ranges. Refer to chart on page E-23 for a list of cable types. Concrete tight when taped. 850A - 856A A 857A A A B C B C E18304 LR49636 CABLE RANGE CABLE RANGE MC AP and HCF MC AP are registered trademarks of the Southwire Company. E-17 Flex AC MC

156 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page 18 R R R R Arlington Industries, Inc. sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ Screw-In Connectors For flexible metal conduit. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C GF /8 1/ GF /2 1/ GF /4 3/ GF GF /4 1-1/ GF /2 1-1/ GF A E60812 LR49636 C B Screw-In Coupling For flexible metal conduit. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE UNIT STD DIM DIM NUMBER MFG # SIZE PKG PKG A B GFC / GFC / GFC GFC / GFC / GFC A E60812 LR49636 B Flex AC MC E-18

157 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page 19 R R R R R R sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ Arlington Industries, Inc. Screw-In Connectors with Insulated Throat For flexible metal conduit. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C GF38A /8 1/ GF50A /2 1/ GF75A /4 3/ GF100A GF125A /4 1-1/ GF150A /2 1-1/ GF200A A E60812 LR49636 C B Screw-In SNAP-TITE Connectors With spring steel clip. For flexible metal conduit. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C GF38ST /8 1/ GF50ST /2 1/ GF75ST /4 3/ SNAP-TITE products have been tested and listed by UL in accordance with UL s ground fault requirements. For additional information see page 6. PATENTED. A E60812 LR49636 C B Screw-In SNAP-TITE Connectors with Insulated Throat With spring steel clip. For flexible metal conduit. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C GF38AST /8 1/ GF50AST /2 1/ SNAP-TITE products have been tested and listed by UL in accordance with UL s ground fault requirements. For additional information see page 6. PATENTED. A E60812 LR49636 C B E-19 Flex AC MC

158 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page 20 R R R R R R Arlington Industries, Inc. sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ Combination Coupling EMT set-screw to Flex. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED EMT FLEX UNIT STD DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B RANGE 860* /2 3/ /2 1/ /4 3/ *CSA only. A E60812 LR49636 B Combination Coupling EMT set-screw to Flex. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED EMT FLEX UNIT STD DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B RANGE /2 1/ /4 3/ A E60812 LR49636 B Combination Coupling EMT compression to flexible metal conduit. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED EMT FLEX UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM DIM NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B C D GF /2 3/ GF /2 1/ GF /4 3/ GF A E60812 LR49636 D C I.D. B Flex AC MC E-20

159 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:01 PM Page 21 R R sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ Arlington Industries, Inc. Anti-Short Bushings Plastic. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE CABLE STD DIM DIM NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZES PKG A B AS /16" 14/2, 14/3, 12/2 100/BAG AS /8" 14/4, 12/3, 6/1, 4/1 100/BAG AS /16" 12/4, 10/2, 10/3, 2/1 50/BAG AS /2" 10/4, 8/2, 8/3, 1/1 50/BAG AS /4" 8/4, 6/2, 6/3, 6/4, 4/2, 4/3 50/BAG AS " 3-1, 2-1, 2-1/10, 1-300MCM, 1-350MCM 25/BAG MCM, 1-450MCM, 1-500MCM AS /4" 4-1, 4-1/10, 4-2/0, 3-1/0, 3-2/0 10/BAG /0, 2-2/0, 2-3/0, 2-4/ MCM, 1-650MCM, 1-700MCM 1-750MCM, 1-800MCM, 1-900MCM AS /2" 4-3/0, 4-4/0, 3-4/0 10/BAG MCM, 3-300MCM, 2-250MCM 2-300MCM, 2-350MCM, MCM AS to 2-1/2" 4-250MCM, 4-300MCM, 4-350MCM 10/BAG MCM, 4-450MCM, 4-500MCM 3-350MCM, 3-400MCM, 3-450MCM 3-500MCM, 2-400MCM, 2-450MCM 2-500MCM A E62807 LR49636 B 1-Hole AC/MC Strap Plated steel. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED CABLE CABLE UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM NUMBER MFG # RANGE SIZES PKG PKG A B C /4, 14/3, 12/ /3, 10/3, 10/2, 12/ #4 and # bare copper C A 310 B 311 E-21 Flex AC MC

160 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:02 PM Page 22 R R R R R R Arlington Industries, Inc. sales@aifittings.com 800/ FAX 570/ Connectors For flexible metal conduit. Screw in type with sliding cover. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B GF /2 1/ GF /4 3/ GF B SLIDING COVER E18304 LR49636 A 90 SNAP-TITE Connectors With spring steel clip. For flexible metal conduit. Screw-in type with sliding cover. Zinc die-cast. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED TRADE KO UNIT STD DIM DIM NUMBER MFG # SIZE SIZE PKG PKG A B GF838ST /8 1/ GF850ST /2 1/ SNAP-TITE products have been tested and listed by UL in accordance with UL s ground fault requirements. For additional information see page 6. PATENTED. B SLIDING COVER E18304 LR49636 A Stackable AC/MC/ Flex Cable Strap Holds AC MC Flex cable securely centered on wood or metal studs...14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, 10/2, 10/3. CATALOG UPC/DCI/NAED UNIT STD DIM DIM DIM CABLE NUMBER MFG # PKG PKG A B C RANGE NM PATENTED. E18304 LR49636 A C Screw to the stud, then add as many as you need! CABLE RANGE B Listed for support, not just positioning! The easy to use Stackable Cable Strap holds up to 5 runs of cable! Meets 2005 NEC Codes , , and Meets requirements of proposed UL standard 2239 for support of conduit and cable Includes screw for attaching to wood or metal studs Listed for use in environmental air handling spaces per 2005 NEC code requirement (c). Flex AC MC E-22

161 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:02 PM Page / FAX 570/ Arlington Industries, Inc. Cable Types Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC) Armored Cable (AC) Metal Clad Cable (MC) AC/ MC Style Part Number ST = SNAP-TITE KO Size Outer Armor Diameter Flex MC/AC Throat Diameter Number of Cables Insulated Throat Steel Aluminum Reduced Wall Steel Reduced Wall Aluminum Steel Aluminum Steel Aluminum Corrugated Aluminum Continuous Corrugated Aluminum Rectangular Continuous Corrugated Healthcare Facilities 90 Two Screw Clamp Type Connectors Squeeze Connectors (Continued next page) 85 1/ ST 1/ A 1/ AST 1/ / A 1/ ST 1/ AST 1/ / A 1/ ST 1/ AST 1/ / A 3/ A / A 1-1/ / A 1-1/ A / A 2-1/ A / A 3-1/ A L42 1/ L420 1/ x L421 1/ L421A 1/ L422 3/ L422A 3/ L L423A L / L424A 1-1/ L / L425A 1-1/ L L426A E-23 Flex AC MC

162 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:02 PM Page 24 Arlington Industries, Inc / FAX 570/ Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC) Armored Cable (AC) Metal Clad Cable (MC) AC/ MC Style Squeeze Connectors (Continued) Clamp Type Two Cable Connectors Set Screw Connectors SADDLEGRIP Duplex Connectors Two Screw Clamp Type Connectors Off Center Set Screw Type Part Number ST = SNAP-TITE KO Size Outer Armor Diameter Flex MC/AC Throat Diameter Number of Cables Insulated Throat Steel Aluminum Reduced Wall Aluminum L / L427A 2-1/ L L428A L / L429A 3-1/ L L4210A / ST 1/ AST 1/ SS 1/ / ST 1/ L48 1/ L49 3/ SG3838 1/ SG3838A 1/ SG3838ST 1/ SG3838AST 1/ / / / / / ST 1/ / ST 1/ / x ST 1/ x / ST 1/ / / / / / / / x ST 1/ x R 1/ Reduced Wall Steel Steel Aluminum Steel Aluminum Corrugated Aluminum Continuous Corrugated Aluminum Rectangular Continuous Corrugated Healthcare Facilities Flex AC MC E-24

163 LngfrdE_v3 10/9/07 11:10 PM Page / FAX 570/ Arlington Industries, Inc. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC) Armored Cable (AC) Metal Clad Cable (MC) AC/ MC Style Part Number ST = SNAP-TITE KO Size Outer Armor Diameter Flex MC/AC Throat Diameter Number of Cables Insulated Throat Steel Aluminum Reduced Wall Steel Reduced Wall Aluminum Steel Aluminum Steel Aluminum Corrugated Aluminum Continuous Corrugated Aluminum Rectangular Continuous Corrugated Healthcare Facilities Single Screw Clamp Type Straight SADDLEGRIP Connectors SNAP 2 IT Connectors Push-In Type L16 1/ x L16ST 1/ x L160 1/ L160ST 1/ L15A 1/ x L15AST 1/ x L17 1/ L17ST 1/ L18 3/ L18ST 3/ L L19ST SG38 1/ SG38A 1/ SG38AST 1/ SG380 1/ x SG380A 1/ x SG380AST 1/ x SG40 1/ SG50 1/ SG50A 1/ SG50ST 1/ SG50AST 1/ SG75 3/ SG75A 3/ SG75ST 3/ SG75AST 3/ AST 1/ AST 1/ AST 1/ AST 1/ AST 1/ ST 1/ A 1/ AST 1/ AST 1/ ST 1/ AST 1/ AST 1/ AST 1/ AST 1/ AST 1/ AST 1/ AST 1/ AST 1/ E-25 Flex AC MC

164 LngfrdE 8/10/07 8:02 PM Page 26 Arlington Industries, Inc / FAX 570/ MCI-A Cable Ranges MCI-A Style Part Number ST = SNAP-TITE KO Size Cable Range End Stop Diameter Number of Cables Insulated Throat MC AP HCF MC AP 90 Two Screw Clamp Type Connectors Clamp Type Two Cable Connectors SADDLEGRIP Duplex Connectors Two Screw Clamp Type Connectors Single Screw Clamp Type Connectors Straight SADDLEGRIP Connectors SNAP 2 IT Connectors Push-In Type 85 1/ ST 1/ / A 1/ / A 1/ ST 1/ AST 1/ / ST 1/ / ST 1/ SG3838 1/ SG3838A 1/ SG3838ST 1/ SG3838AST 1/ / ST 1/ / ST 1/ L16 1/ L16ST 1/ L160 1/ L160ST 1/ SG38 1/ SG38A 1/ SG38AST 1/ SG380 1/ SG380A 1/ SG380AST 1/ SG40 1/ SG50 1/ SG50A 1/ SG50AST 1/ SG50ST 1/ AST 1/ AST 1/ AST 1/ AST 1/ Flex AC MC E-26 MC AP and HCF MC AP are registered trademarks of the Southwire Company.

165 A Metallic Boxes and Covers Switch Boxes A2-A11 Thru-Wall Boxes/Switch Accessories A12 Octagon and Round Boxes and Accessories A13 Octagon Boxes A14-A16 Ceiling Fan Boxes A17-A19 Square Boxes and Accessories A20-A31 Includes New Pre-Fabricated Assemblies A24-A25 Utility Boxes and Accessories A32-A33 Gang Boxes and Accessories A34-A35 Concrete Boxes and Accessories A36 Gangable Masonry Boxes/ Thru-Wall Boxes A37 Adj. Bar Hangers/Box Accessories A38 Box Accessories A39-A40

166 A Steel City Switch Boxes Steel City Metallic Boxes & Covers Steel City is the industry leading product line of metallic switch and outlet boxes used in electrical construction. Since 1904, Steel City products have symbolized the highest quality standards in manufacturing and innovative design, with one of the most complete offerings available. Steel City products are known for their simple improvements, such as being the first box offering to standardize combination slotted/phillips screws on all boxes. Thomas & Betts is also recognized as a leader in design innovation, as in our new metal stud bracket. Thomas & Betts continues to listen to contractors and responds to their everchanging needs. Contact a T&B distributor nearest you to select the right Steel City product for your requirements. Advantages of Steel City Boxes & Covers Notched Ears on Switch Boxes Steel City Switch Boxes feature a longer ear and a special notch. This provides clearance for the screws that are used to attach wall plates to GFCI or rocker-type light switches. Universal Metal Stud Bracket Mounts without the use of screws. Mounts to the open or closed side of the stud. Works on any depth of non-loadbearing metal stud. Eccentric Knockouts on Square Boxes Provide better contact with conduit fitting and locknut to the box, improves grounding path, stronger than f" knockout. Available in all four standard size square boxes. Improved f" Knockout Position on Square Boxes Less labor required to install f" conduit to box. Raised Ground Screw in Utility Boxes Quicker surface mounting by eliminating the need to remove the portion of the screw that threads through the back of the box. Allows for improved repositioning of grounding conductor. Preinstalled Screws are Packaged in Raised Position Eliminates extra step of having to back out the screw during cover installation. Steel City switch and outlet boxes are protected from rust and corrosion by zincgalvanizing. All clamps and other component parts are electrogalvanized separately, before assembly in the box, to ensure corrosion protection of every surface. Steel City galvanized finish meets the requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and Federal Specifications. A Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

167 Switch Boxes N.E.C. Reference Article 314 of the National Electric Code covers the installation and use of boxes. The article includes table references that guide the electrician in the selection of the proper box size necessary to safely accommodate electrical service requirements. The box capacity table shown on page 4 is reproduced in part from the N.E.C. as a quick reference and guide. The N.E.C. should be consulted for complete details. Article 314 Boxes and Fittings Number of Conductors in Outlet, Device, and Junction Boxes, and Conduit Bodies. Boxes shall be of sufficient size to provide free space for all conductors enclosed in the box. The provisions of this section shall not apply to terminal housings supplied with motors. (See Section ) Boxes and conduit bodies containing conductors, size No. 4 or larger, shall also comply with the provisions of Section (a) Standard Boxes. The maximum number of conductors permitted in standard boxes are listed in Table (A) reproduced in part on page 4. See Article (A) through (D) where boxes or conduit bodies are used as junction or pull boxes. (1) Table (A) shall apply where no fittings or devices, such as fixture studs, cable clamps, hickeys, switches, or receptacles, are contained in the box and where no grounding conductors are part of the wiring within the box. Where one or more of these types of fittings, such as fixture studs, cable clamps, or hickeys are contained in the box, the number of conductors shown in the table must be reduced by one for each type of fitting; an additional deduction of one conductor must be made for each strap containing one or more devices; and a further deduction of one conductor shall be made for one or more grounding conductors entering the box. Where a second set of equipment grounding conductors, as permitted by Section (D), Exception No. 4, is present in the box, then an additional deduction of one conductor must be made. A conductor running through the box is counted as one conductor, and each conductor originating outside of the box and terminating inside the box is counted as one conductor. Conductors, no part of which leaves the box, shall not be counted. The volume of a wiring enclosure (box) shall be the total volume of the assembled sections, and, where used, the space provided by plaster rings, domed covers, extension rings, etc., that are marked with their volume in cubic inches, or are made from boxes the dimensions of which are listed in Table (A). (2) For combinations of conductor sizes shown in Table (A), the maximum number of conductors permitted is computed using the volume per conductor listed in Table (B) with the deductions provided for in Section (A)(1) and these volume deductions shall be based on the largest conductor entering the box. The maximum number and size of conductors listed in Table (A) must not be exceeded. (b) Other Boxes. Boxes 100 cubic inches or less, other than those described in Table (A), conduit bodies having provisions for more than two conduit entries and nonmetallic boxes shall be durably and legibly marked by the manufacturer with their cubic inch capacity. The maximum number of conductors permitted shall be computed using the volume per conductor listed in Table (A), with the deductions provided for in Section (A)(1), and these volume deductions shall be based on the largest conductor entering the box. Boxes described in Table (A) that have a larger cubic inch capacity than is designated in the table shall be permitted to have their cubic inch capacity marked as required by this section and the maximum number of conductors permitted shall be computed using the volume per conductor listed in Table (B). (c) Conduit Bodies. Conduit bodies enclosing No. 6 conductors or smaller shall have a cross-sectional area not less than twice the crosssectional area of the largest conduit to which it is attached. The maximum number of conductors permitted shall be the maximum number permitted by Table I, Chapter 9, for the conduit to which it is attached. Conduit bodies having provisions for less than three conduit entries shall not contain splices, taps, or devices unless they comply with the provisions of Section (B) and are supported in a rigid and secure manner. A Steel City 2003 Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice. A3

168 A Steel City Switch Boxes Table (A) Metal Boxes Minimum Maximum Number Box Trade Size Volume of Conductors* mm in. cm 3 in x 32 (4 x 1b) round/octagonal x 38 (4 x 1d) round/octagonal x 54 (4 x 2a) round/octagonal x 32 (4 x 1b) square x 38 (4 x 1d) square x 54 (4 x 2a) square x 32 (4L x 1b) square x 38 (4L x 1d) square x 54 (4L x 2a) square x 50 x 38 (3 x 2 x 1d) device x 50 x 50 (3 x 2 x 2) device x 50 x 57 (3 x 2 x 2b) device x 50 x 65 (3 x 2 x 2d) device x 50 x 70 (3 x 2 x 2f) device x 50 x 90 (3 x 2 x 3d) device x 54 x 38 (4 x 2a x 1d) device x 54 x 48 (4 x 2a x 1g) device x 54 x 54 (4 x 2a x 2a) device x 50 x 65 (3f x 2 x 2d) masonry box/gang x 50 x 90 (3f x 2 x 3d) masonry box/gang min depth FS single cover/gang (1f) min depth FD single cover/gang (2c) min depth FS multiple cover/gang (1f) min depth FD multiple cover/gang (2c) *Where no volume allowances are required by (B)(2) through (B)(5). Underwriters Laboratories Inc. File Number: E2969 (U.L. 514A) Canadian Standards Association File Number: LR Federal Manufacture Number: (Cage Code) Products Designed To Meet Federal Specification Number: W-J-800 Verification of file numbers and compliance with federal specifications for individual items available upon request. Box and Cover Material and Plating Specification;.062" minimum thickness, Hot Rolled, Pre galvanized steel, minimum spangle. ASTM G-90-U, AISI C-1008 Bracket Material: All brackets except MS style; 16 gauge (.060") Hot Rolled, Pre galvanized Steel AISI C-1008, G-90-U. MS Style bracket; 20 gauge (.036") Cold Rolled Spring Steel AISI C-1055, Heat Treated to R. 35 Zinc Plated.0005 thick. A Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

169 Switch Boxes Table (B) Volume Allowance Required per Conductor Size of Conductor Free Space Within Box For Each Conductor (AWG) cm 3 in. 3 No No No No No No No A Steel City Reprinted with permission from National Fire Protection Association National Electrical Code, Copyright 1986, National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA This reprinted material is not the complete and official position of the NFPA on the referenced subject which is represented only by the standard in its entirety. NEC is a registered trademark of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc., Quincy, MA Underwriters Laboratories Inc. File Number: E2969 (U.L. 514A) Canadian Standards Association File Number: LR Federal Manufacture Number: Products Designed To Meet Federal Specification Number: A-A5924 (formerly W-J-800) Verification of file numbers and compliance with federal specifications for individual items available upon request. Box and Cover Material and Plating Specification;.062" minimum thickness, Hot Rolled, Pre-galvanized steel, minimum spangle. ASTM G-90-U, AISI C-1008 Bracket Material: All brackets except MS style; 16 gauge (.060") Hot Rolled, Pre-galvanized Steel AISI C-1008, G-90-U. MS Style bracket; 20 gauge (.036") Cold Rolled Spring Steel AISI C-1055, Heat Treated to R. 35 Zinc Plated.0005 thick. Metallic Boxes Fire Resistance Rating Wall Penetrations Listed single and double gang metallic outlet and switch boxes and octagon ceiling boxes with metallic or nonmetallic cover plates may be used in bearing and nonbearing wood stud and steel stud walls with ratings not exceeding 2 hr. These walls shall have gypsum wallboard facings similar to those shown in Design Nos. U301, U411, and U in. square boxes may be used in 2 hr. fire rated ceilings. The surface area of individual metallic outlet or switch boxes shall not exceed 16 sq. in. The aggregate surface area of the boxes shall not exceed 100 sq. inches per 100 sq. ft. of wall. Boxes located on opposite sides of walls or partitions shall be separated by a horizontal distance of 24 in. The metallic outlet or switch boxes shall be securely fastened to the studs and the opening in the wallboard facing shall be cut so that the clearance between the box and the wallboard does not exceed a in Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice. A5

170 A Steel City Switch Boxes Guide to Steel City Knock-Outs, Pry-Outs and Ears Knockouts and Pry-outs Steel City conduit KOs have standard trade size dimensions. KOs are uniform and true for attachment of cable or conduit connectors. Pry-outs for cable entrance are slotted a twist with screw driver removes them. KOs and Pry-outs are precision stamped to permit easy removal, but remain sufficiently strong and sturdy when not removed. Knockouts Switch and Outlet Box Ears Mounting ears support the box independent of the electrical system attachments. Box ears are of one-screw or two-screw design. Two-screw models permit the use of the end conduit KO and are mounted on the NE octagon box; and most switch boxes. Catalog No. s LXW, LXWOW, LC, LCOW, LCNOW, A-1-2E, LX and LXOW have one-screw ears. Ears for plaster are set h" forward of the box face in position for old work (modernization) except where specifically noted. d" Conduit KO f" Conduit KO 1" Conduit KO Eccentric Knockouts Pry-outs One-screw ear Two-screw ear Combination d" & f" Knockout Cable pry-outs always in pairs. Tapped Holes for Grounding All Steel City boxes have a tapped hole in the bottom of the box for attaching separate ground wire. A Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

171 Switch Boxes Guide to Steel City Brackets and Clamps Brackets A Steel City S or B Type Mounts to face of stud. Used on switch, handy or square boxes. 2" long - 2a" wide T Type Positions handy box against the face and side of stud. 5d" long - g" wide SV Type Mounts box to side of stud with positioning spikes. 7 c" long - 1" wide - c" offset CV Type (Outlet Boxes) Mounts to flat side of metal studs or wood studs. 7 c" long - 1" wide - c" offset DV Type Mounts box offset from stud 1d". 6m" long - 1" wide " offset MS Type (For Metal Studs) Mounts to any depth of metal stud, open or closed side. 2d" long - 1L" wide - c" offset L Type Used to toe mount octagon boxes. 2e" long - 3e" wide - b" offset V Type Mounts to flat side of stud. 7 c" long - 1" wide - c" offset Clamps For armored cable C-1 C-8 (Loom only) C-10 C-5 C-3 For nonmetallic sheathed cable and nonmetallic tubing (loom) UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. and CANADIAN STANDARDS ASSOCIATION file numbers for individual items available upon request. Products listed in this catalog are subject to alteration or discontinuation without prior notice. Listing Information for Armored Cable Clamp Type C-3 Armored Cable (BX) - Steel Sizes 14-2 through 10-3 Armored Cable (BX) - Aluminum Sizes 14-2 through 10-3 MC Interlocked (MCI) - Steel diameter MC Interlocked (MCI) - Aluminum diameter MC Corrugated (MCC) - Aluminum diameter Flex Metal Conduit - Steel a" trade size Flex Metal Conduit - Aluminum c" trade size C-3 Clamp Acceptable for Grounding 2003 Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice. A7

172 A Steel City Switch Boxes 3f" x 2" Switch Boxes Cat. Std. No. Clamps Ears Brkts. Knockouts Ctn. SSV SSQV With nonmetallic sheathed cable clamps 1" deep non-gangable 6.5 cubic inch capacity SSV Flat 2 Pry-outs one end 25 SSQV Yes Flat 2 Pry-outs one end with 25 nonmetallic cable clamps Not U.L. Listed SWB Ears flush for old work LXMWOW Ears flush for old work LCOW-25 Ears flush old work 811-SW S bracket recessed e" LXMOW Ears flush for old work LCOWC Adapts to any wall thickness up to f" 3" x 2" Switch Boxes Knockouts Cat. Ea. End Ea. End Bottom Bottom Std. No. Clamps Ears Brkts. Conduit Cable Cable Cable Conduit Ctn. 1d" deep non-gangable with nonmetallic sheathed cable clamps 7.5 cubic inch capacity SWB-25 C-5 Yes SW C-5 S " deep gangable with nonmetallic cable clamps 10.5 cubic inch capacity LXMWOW-25 C-5 Yes 2 1 d" 25 2" deep gangable with armored cable/metal clad clamps 10.5 cubic inch capacity LXMOW-25 C-3 Yes 2 1 d" 25 Knockouts Cat. Ea. End Bottom Std. No. Clamps Ears Brkts. Conduit Cable Conduit Ctn. 2b" deep gangable beveled corners with nonmetallic sheathed cable clamps 10.5 cubic inch capacity LCOW-25 C-1 Yes 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 LCOWC C-1 Yes 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 LCLE-25 C-1 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 LCV-25 C-1 CV 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 LCNOW-25 C-1 Yes 1 d" 2 1 d" S C-1 S 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 2b" deep non-gangable with nonmetallic sheathed cable clamps 10.5 cubic inch capacity A C-1 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 A-1-2E-25 C-1 Yes 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 A C-1 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 LCLE LCV CV bracket recessed f" LCNOW Ears flush old work A-1-2 A-1-2E Ears flush A-16 With nails 802-S S bracket recessed e" A Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

173 Switch Boxes 3" x 2" Switch Boxes Continued Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Bottom Std. No. Brkts. Ears Conduit Conduit Conduit Ctn. A Steel City CDOW Ears flush CDLE CDOW-TG-25 Ears flush CDV CV bracket recessed g" NEW 2d" deep gangable with conduit KOs 12.5 cubic inch capacity CDOW Yes 1 d" 1 d" 2 d" 50 CDOW-TG-25 Yes 1 d" 1 d" 2 d" 25 CDLE-25 1 d" 1 d" 2 d" 25 CDV-25 CV 1 d" 1 d" 2 d" S S 1 d" 1 d" 2 d" 25 Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Bottom Std. No. Clamps Ears Brkts. Conduit Conduit Cable Conduit Ctn. 2d" deep gangable with nonmetallic sheathed cable clamps 12.5 cubic inch capacity LXWOW-25 C-5 Yes 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 LXWOWP C-5 Yes 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 LXWLE-25 C-5 1 1d" 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 LXWOWC-25 C-5 Yes 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 LXWSV C-5 SV 1 d" 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 LXWV-25 C-5 CV 1 d" 1 1d" 2 1 d" 25 LXWV-2G C-5 CV 1 d" 2 d" 4 2 d" SW C-5 S 1 d" 1 d" 2 1 d" SW-1 4 C-5 S 1 d" 1 1d" 2 1 d" 25 2d" deep non-gangable with nonmetallic sheathed cable clamps 12.5 cubic inch capacity A C-5 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 A C-5 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 A-258 C-5 1 d" 2 1 d" S S bracket recessed e" LXWOW-25 Ears flush for old work LXWOWP LXWLE LXWOWC Adapts to any wall thickness up to f" LXWSV SV bracket recessed k" LXWV CV bracket recessed g" LXWV-2G 2-gang with CV bracket recessed g" 806-SW S bracket recessed e" 806-SW-1 4 S bracket recessed b" A-254 A-257 With nails slanted for easy drive-in A-258 Without nails 2003 Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice. A9

174 A Steel City Switch Boxes 3" x 2" Switch Boxes Continued Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Bottom Std. No. Clamps Ears Brkts. Conduit Conduit Cable Conduit Ctn. LXOW-25 Ears flush for old work LXLE LXVP LXOWC Adapts to f" wall thickness LXV-25 CV bracket recessed g" 806-S S bracket recessed e" NEW 2d" deep gangable with armored cable/metal clad clamps 12.5 cubic inch capacity LXOW-25 C-3 Yes 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 LXOWC-25 C-3 Yes 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 LXLE C-3 1 d" 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 LXV-25 C-3 CV 1 d" 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 LXVP C-3 CV 1 d" 1 d" 2 1 d" S C-3 S 1 d" 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 2d" deep non-gangable with armored cable/metal clad clamps 12.5 cubic inch capacity A-256 C-3 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 2f" deep gangable with conduit KOs 14.0 cubic inch capacity CW-1/2 Yes 1 d" 1 d" 1 d" 50 CW-3/4-25 Yes 1 f" 1 f" 1 f" 25 CWLE-1/ d" 1 d" 1 d" 25 CWLE-3/4 1 f" 1 f" 1 f" 25 CWV-1/2 CV 1 d" 1 d" 1 d" 25 2f" deep gangable with nonmetallic sheathed cable clamps 14.0 cubic inch capacity CWN-25 C-5 Yes 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 CWNLE C-5 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 CWNV-25 C-5 CV 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 2f" deep gangable with armored cable/metal clad clamps 14.0 cubic inch capacity CWX-25 C-3 Yes 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 CWXV-25 C-3 CV 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 A-256 With nails slanted for easy drive-in CW-1/2 Ears flush CW-3/4 Ears flush CWLE-1/2 CWLE-3/4 CWV-1/2 CV bracket recessed g" CWN-25 Ears flush CWNLE CWNV CV bracket recessed g" CWX Ears flush CWXV CV bracket recessed g" A Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

175 Switch Boxes 3" x 2" Switch Boxes Continued Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Bottom Wt. Std. No. Clamps Ears Brkts. Conduit Conduit Cable Conduit Per C Ctn. A Steel City CY-1/2 Ears flush CYLE-1/2 CY-3/4 Ears flush CYLE-3/4 3d" deep gangable with conduit KOs 18.0 cubic inch capacity CY-1/2 Yes 2 d" 2 d" 1 d" CY-3/4 Yes 2 f" 2 f" 1 d" CYLE-1/2 2 d" 2 d" 1 d" CYLE-3/4 2 f" 2 f" 1 d" d" deep gangable with nonmetallic sheathed cable clamps 18.0 cubic inch capacity CXWLE C-5 2 d" 1 d" 2 1 d" CXWOW C-5 Yes 2 d" 1 d" 2 1 d" CXWOWP C-5 Yes 2 d" 1 d" 2 1 d" CXWV C-5 CV 2 1d" 1 d" 2 1 d" CXWVP C-5 CV 2 d" 1 d" 2 1 1d" d" deep gangable with armored cable/metal clad clamps 18.0 cubic inch capacity CX C-3 Yes 2 d" 1 d" 2 1 d" CXLESSX C-1 No SSX 2 d" 1 d" 2 1 d" CXP C-3 Yes 2 d" 1 d" 2 1 d" CXV C-3 CV 2 d" 1 d" 2 1 d" CXWLE CXWOW Ears flush for old work CXWOWP CXWV CV bracket recessed g" CXWVP CX Ears flush CXLESSX CXP CXV CV bracket recessed g" PLXWV CV bracket recessed g" PS 3" x 2" Extra Capacity Switch Boxes Knockouts Cat. Ea. End Bottom Wt. Std. No. Clamps Brkts. Conduit Cable Conduit Per C Ctn. 2d" deep gangable with nonmetallic sheathed cable clamps 18.0 cubic inch capacity PLXWV C-5 CV 1 d" 2 1 d" PS Fits 3" x 2" gangable switch boxes 2d" deep and adds 5.5 cu. in. capacity 2003 Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice. A11

176 A Steel City Thru-Wall Boxes/Switch Accessories 4" x 2h" Thru-Wall Box Cat. Cu. In. Box Depth Std. No. Knockouts Cap. (in.) Ctn. CTDW With conduit KOs for plaster or dry wall CTDW Drywall, partition type; One d" and one f" KO both ends; j 25 one d" KO on one side, V bracket other side LVB New Product Steel Low Voltage Bracket Cat. Depth Std. No. Description (in.) Ctn. LVB Bracketed to T&B boxes; provides means of installing a 1A 25 low-voltage device alongside a regular switch or outlet. Fixes to the switch box easily with the screws provided. Works with any Steel City or Bowers switch box, regardless of depth. Single screw fixing as well as two screw fixing. Low voltage cable support is provided by fitting location tabs. UL listed for low voltage support. Switch Box Supports Cat. Std. No. Description Ctn. 820-D Two metal holders for mounting old-work switch boxes 500 in all types of wall materials (1d" max thickness) sets 820-D SBEX Switch Box Extension Cat. Std. No. Description Ctn. SBEX Cubic content 3.5 inches; fits snugly inside of all single 50 gang switch boxes; maximum adjustable depth g"; furnished with 1b" long screws for mounting U.L. Listing not applicable subject to approval by local inspector Kruse Switch Box Supports Cat. Length Std. No. Description (in.) Ctn Will accommodate any standard switch box with mounting 16d 50 ears singly or in gangs Pairs 8101 Each set consists of two metal strips; numerous nail holes are 18d 50 provided for fastening regardless of stud spacing Pairs To Install: Nail lower strip to studding, insert ear of switch box into U-shaped channel, apply upper channel over top ear and nail to studding. OWC Adapts to any wall thickness up to 3 4". Old Work Box Support Clips Cat. Std. No. Description Ctn. OWC Clips lock old-work steel switch boxes tightly to wall plaster, drywall, 250 concrete block, brick, or concrete. 2 required per box, (1 set) sets A Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

177 Octagon and Round Boxes and Accessories 3d" Octagon Boxes Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. Side Ea. End Ea. End Bottom Std. No. Clamps Clamps Conduit Conduit Cable Conduit Ctn. A Steel City / /2 1d" deep with conduit KOs 11.8 cubic inch capacity /2 1 d" 1 d" 1 d" /2 1 d" 1 d" 50 1d" deep with nonmetallic sheathed cable clamps 11.8 cubic inch capacity N C-5 1 d" 2 1 d" NV C-5 1 d" 2 1 d" N NV V bracket recessed d" C Cover screws supplied D Cover screws supplied 3b" Round Boxes Knockouts Cat. Bottom Std. No. Clamps Conduit Cable Ctn. d" deep with nonmetallic sheathed cable clamps 4.0 cubic inch capacity C-30 C-8 1 d" 4 30 f" deep with nonmetallic sheathed cable clamps 5.5 cubic inch capacity D C-10 1 d" C-1 24-C-6 3d" Round Covers Cat. Std. No. Description Ctn. For 3d" octagon and round boxes 24-C-1 Flat, blank C-6 Flat with d" KO CFB.580 4" Round Box Knockouts Cat. Bottom Std. No. Description Conduit Ctn. d" deep with conduit KOs 6.0 cubic inch capacity Steel Outlet Box 4 d" CFB* Ceiling fan box with plastic Romex 2 d" 10 connector included. NC501-SC *Meets NEC (c) up to 35 lb. fan CFB is shipped with plastic cover and all hardware NC501-SC (Included with CFB) 2003 Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice. A13

178 A Steel City Octagon Boxes / /4 4" Octagon Boxes Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Ea. End Bottom Std. No. Clamps Ears Brkts. Conduit Conduit Cable Conduit Ctn. 1d" deep with conduit KOs 15.8 cubic inch capacity /2 1 d" 1 d" 5 d" /4 1 f" 1 f" 3 d" 50 2 f" /2 & d" 1 f" 3 d" 50 2 f" V-1/2 V 1 d" 1 d" 5 d" L-1/2 L 1 d" 1 d" 5 d" J-1/2 With Bar 1 d" 1 d" 4 d" 25 Hanger 50 lb. max loading for fixtures /2 & 3/ V-1/2 V bracket recessed d" J-1/2 Mounted on 6010-DW bar adjustable 10d" to 18d". Offset for d", f" or g" plaster. Maximum horizontal positioning. d" fixture stud L-1/2 L bracket flush mounted 4" Octagon Boxes Continued Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Ea. End Bottom Std. No. Clamps Ears Brkts. Conduit Conduit Cable Conduit Ctn N NE Adjustable ears recessed e" 1d" deep with nonmetallic sheathed cable clamps 15.8 cubic inch capacity N C-5 1 d" 2 1 d" NE C-5 1 d" 2 1 d" NL C-5 L 1 d" 2 1 d" NV C-5 V 1 d" 2 1 d" NL L bracket flush mounted NV V bracket recessed d" Cat. Bar Hanger Bar Lgth. Offset Std. No. Number (in.) For Stud Ctn. 1d" deep for nonmetallic sheathed cable 15.8 cubic inch capacity NF 6010-DW 10d-18d c" NO 6010-ADW 14d-26d c" NG 6011-DW 10d-18d Fastener NP 6011-ADW 14d-26d Fastener 25 1d" deep for armored cable/metal clad 15.8 cubic inch capacity AF 6010-DW 10d-18d Drywall c" lb. max loading for fixtures N Octagon box mounted on adjustable bar hanger. 50 lb. load max rating A Octagon box mounted on adjustable bar hanger 50 lb. load max rating A Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

179 Octagon Boxes 4" Octagon Boxes Continued Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Ea. End Bottom Std. No. Clamps Brkts. Conduit Conduit Cable Conduit Ctn. A Steel City A AL L bracket mounted flush AV V bracket recessed d" /2 1d" deep with armored cable/metal clad clamps 15.8 cubic inch capacity A C-3 1 d" 2 1 d" AV C-3 V 1 d" 2 1 d" AL C-3 L 1 d" 2 1 d" 25 2a" deep with conduit KOs 22.5 cubic inch capacity /2 1 d" 1 d" 5 d" /4 1 f" 1 f" 3 d" 25 2 f" /2 & 3/4 1 d" 1 f" 3 d" 25 2 f" " 1 1" 3 d" 25 2 f" 2a" deep with nonmetallic sheathed cable clamps 22.5 cubic inch capacity N C-5 1 d" 2 1 d" NL C-5 L 1 d" 2 1 d" NV-25 C-5 V 1 d" 2 1 d" lb. max loading for fixtures / /2 & 3/ N NL L bracket mounted flush NV V bracket recessed d" 4" Octagon Box Extension Rings Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Std. No. Conduit Conduit Ctn / /2 & 3/4 1d" deep with conduit KOs 15.8 cubic inch capacity /2 1 d" 1 d" /2 & 3/4 1 d" 1 f" Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice. A15

180 A Steel City Octagon Boxes 54-C-1 54-C-6 54-C-7 54-C-3-1/2 54-C-3 54-C C-3-1-1/4 54-C LR 4" Octagon and Round Box Covers Cat. Cu. In. Std. No. Raised Description Cap. Ctn. 54-C-1 Flat, blank C-6 Flat, with d" KO C-7 e" With d" KO C-3-1/2 d" Center blanked with tapped ears on 2f" centers 54-C-3 e" Center blanked with tapped ears on 2f" centers 54-C-3-1 1" Center blanked with tapped ears 2z" centers 54-C-3-1-1/4 1b" Center blanked with tapped ears on 2z" centers 54-C-14 e" For single device LR Flat, center blanked for single 25 receptacle 1u" dia. hole 5402-LR Flat, center blanked for 25 duplex receptacle For Swivel Covers see below and page A LR SHR 1/2 & 3/4 Swivel Hangers Cat. Bar Lgth. Slot Std. No. (in.) Description (in.) Ctn. SHR 1 2 & 3 4 Swivel Hanger for 4 Octagonal Boxes 25 UL Listed for 50 lb. Fixture Support. A Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

181 Ceiling Fan Boxes Fan & Fixture Support Steel and Nonmetallic Boxes and Bar Hangers for Fan and Fixture Installation Exhaustive research and development has resulted in an innovative line of Ceiling Fan Support Boxes that give Thomas & Betts the competitive advantage. Ceiling fan and fixture installation is faster, easier and safer with Steel City and Union Ceiling Fan Support Boxes. A Steel City New Products Old Work Bar Hanger Intended for retrofit installations, the unique design of the Old Work Bar Hanger ensures a trouble-free installation that surpasses the competition. Square end plates keep the bar parallel with sheetrock. Square section tube is easy to grip, allowing high torque for safe installation. UL Listed up to 50 lbs. for fixture and 35 lbs. for fan. Expandable for joists spaced from 16 to 24 inches CFB-BHL-OW Ceiling Fan and Light Fixture Bar Hanger Cat. Capacity New/Old Std. No. Description Cu. In. Work Ctn CFB-BHL-OW Old work bar hanger with 1d" deep ceiling 15.8 Old 10 fan box with 3 x d" KO s and clamps for nonmetallic sheathed cable. Max. Rec. Loads 35 lbs. Fan and 50 lbs. Fixture. New Products Steel Ceiling Fan & Fixture Boxes Gold finish on ears easily identifies boxes as meeting UL and NEC requirements for fan support. UL Listed up to 50 lbs. for fixture and 35 lbs. for fan. Manufactured in the USA, each box comes complete with instructions and installation hardware CFB CFB CFB F-CFB Gold ears indicate at a glance that the box is suitable for fan support. Ceiling Fan Support Boxes Cat. Capacity Dimensions New/Old Std. No. Description Cu. In. Dia. Depth Work Ctn CFB Pan type ceiling fan box with 3 x d" 6.0 4" d" Both 10 KO s and nonmetallic sheathed cable connector CFB 1d" deep ceiling fan box with 3 x d" " 1d" New 10 KO s and clamps for nonmetallic sheathed cable /2-CFB-BP 1d" deep ceiling fan box with 5 x d" " 1d" New 50 KO s. Bulk pack CFB 2a" deep ceiling fan box with 3 x d" " 2a" New 10 KO s and clamps for nonmetallic sheathed cable F-CFB As CFB, but with F style " 2a" New 10 mounting bracket /2-F-CFB-BP 2a" deep ceiling fan box with 5 x d" " 2a" New 50 KO s and F style mounting bracket. Max. Rec. Loads 35 lbs. Fan and 50 lbs. Fixture Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice. A17

182 A Steel City Ceiling Fan Boxes 4170-CFB CFB Union Nonmetallic Ceiling Fan & Fixture Boxes Molded of extremely high impact phenolic material that won t crack in cold conditions or deform in hot conditions. Each box comes complete with instructions and installation hardware. The CFB has an additional metal bracket for added security. Ceiling Fan Support Boxes Cat. Capacity Dimensions New/Old Std. No. Description Cu. In. Dia. Depth Work Ctn CFB Nonmetallic nail-on ceiling fan box with " 2c" New 10 High Clamps for nonmetallic sheathed cable and compound angled side nails CFB-BP Nonmetallic nail-on ceiling fan box with " 2c" New 50 High Clamps for nonmetallic sheathed cable and compound angled side nails - Bulk Pack 4170-CFB-S As 4170-CFB, but with steel stud screws " 2c" New 10 instead of nails CFB As 4170-CFB, but with #3 style metal " 2c" New 10 mounting bracket in addition to nails. Max. Rec. Loads 35 lbs. Fan and 50 lbs. Fixture. Features nail lugs for speed of installation. UL Listed for 50 lbs. fixtures and 35 lbs. fans. Two-hour fire rating cubic inch capacity. New Products Extra Heavy Duty New Work Bar Hangers This innovative extruded aluminum Bar Hanger was designed for strength. It is UL Listed for up to 70 lbs. for fan support, and an industry leading 190 lbs. for fixture support. Gold end plates easily identify the hanger as meeting UL and NEC requirements for fan support. Ceiling Fan and Light Fixture Bar Hangers Screwed-on end plates are consistently strong and avoid unsightly welds. End plates feature temporary fixing spikes for hands-free installation. Expandable for joists spaced from 16 to 24 inches. Cat. Capacity Max. Rec. Loads New/Old Std. No. Description Cu. In. Fan Fixture Work Ctn CFB-BHL 54151CFB-BHL 56111CFB-BHL New work bar hanger with d" pan type lbs. 190 lbs. New 10 ceiling fan box with 3 x d" KO s and nonmetallic sheathed cable connector CFB-BHL New work bar hanger with d" deep lbs. 190 lbs. New 10 ceiling fan box with 3 x d" KO s and clamps for nonmetallic sheathed cable. 4070CFB-BHL New work bar hanger with nonmetallic lbs. 50 lbs. New 10 ceiling fan box with clamps for nonmetallic sheathed cable. CFB-BHL New work bar hanger without outlet Dependent on box used. New 10 box. Mounting bracket for outlet box included. 4070CFB-BHL CFB-BHL A Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

183 Ceiling Fan Boxes CFB-12 New Products Saddle Type Ceiling Fan Boxes The new Union Saddle Type Ceiling Fan Boxes are designed to mount the fan or fixture through the box, directly into the joist. The result is a convenient, secure and safe installation. Constructed from high-strength polycarbonate that won t crack in cold conditions or deform in hot conditions. The mounting screws are secured within the box to ensure that they aren t misplaced. Suitable for new and old work installations. Complies with the requirements of UL 514C. A Steel City Ceiling Fan Boxes Cat. Capacity Dimensions New/Old Std. No. Description Cu. In. Dia. Depth Work Ctn. CFB-16 CFB-12 Nonmetallic saddle type ceiling fan box with " 2c" Both 50 v-clamps for nonmetallic sheathed cable. CFB-16 Nonmetallic saddle type ceiling fan box with " 3c" Both 50 v-clamps for nonmetallic sheathed cable and two d" KO s. CFB-16-F Vapor-tight nonmetallic saddle type ceiling fan " 3c" Both 50 box with v-clamps for nonmetallic sheathed cable and two d" KO s. Max. Rec. Loads 70 lbs. Fan and 70 lbs. Fixture. Easy press-fit onto the joist. Integrally molded ribs grip the joist and stop the box from falling. Just one hand is required to mount the box using the pre-located mounting screw. CFB-16-F Integrally molded cable v-clamps provide easy and secure clamping for nonmetallic cables. CFB-16 and CFB-16-F feature 1 2" KO s in addition to v-clamps. Foam gaskets on CFB-16-F make it a vapor-tight box Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice. A19

184 A Steel City Square Boxes and Accessories 4" Square Boxes Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Bottom Std. No. Brkts. Conduit Conduit Cable Ctn /2 1b" deep with conduit KOs 18.0 cubic inch capacity /2 2 d" 3 d" 5 d" / / /2 & 3/ /4-W /2 & 3/ /2 & 3/4-EW /2 & 3/4-EWGB /2 & 3/4-EWP NEW NEW NEW 1d" deep with conduit KOs 21.0 cubic inch capacity drawn /2 3 d" 3 d 5 d /4 2 f 2 f 3 d 50 2 f /2 & 3/4 2 d 2 d 3 d 50 1 f 1 f 2 f /2 & 3/4P 2 d 2 d 3 d 50 1 f 1 f 2 f /4-W 2 f 2 f 3 d 50 2 f B-1/2 & 3/4* B 2 d 2 d 3 d 25 1 d 1 f 2 d & fe & fe & fe /2 & 3/4-EW* H 2 d 2 d 3 d 50 1 d 1 d 2 d & fe & fe & fe /2 & 3/4-EWGB H 2 d 2 d 2 d 50 (Ground Bump) 1 d 1 d 2 d & fe & fe & fe /2 & 3/4-EWGBP H 2 d 2 d 2 d 50 (Ground Bump with 1 d 1 d 2 d 10d" Ground Wire) & fe & fe & fe /2 & 3/4-EWP* H 2 d 2 d 3 d 50 1 d 1 d 2 d & fe & fe & fe MS-1/2 & 3/4* MS 2 d 2 d 3 d 25 1 d 1 f 2 d & fe & fe & fe V-1/2 & 3/4* SV 2 d 2 d 3 d 25 1 d 1 f 2 d & fe & fe & fe CV-3/4 CV 2 f 2 f 3 d CV-1/2 & 3/4* CV 2 d 2 d 3 d 25 1 d 1 f 2 d & fe & fe & fe DV-1/2* DV 2 d 3 d 3 d 25 & fe & fe & fe EF-SSX SSX 1 d 2 d 2 d 25 1 d 1 d 2 d & fe & fe & fe B-1/2 & 3/4 B Bracket mounted flush MS-1/2 & 3/4 For use on 1e", 2d", 3e", 4", 6" metal studs * Per U.L. 514-A, suitable for use without a bonding jumper in circuits above or below 250 volts. * All Bracketed Boxes come complete with eccentric knockouts. Pigtail wire is #12 AWG insulated, 10d" long V-1/2 & 3/4 SV Bracket mounted flush CV-3/4 CV Bracket mounted flush CV-1/2 & 3/4 CV Bracket mounted flush DV-1/2 DV Bracket provides offset EF-SSX A Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

185 Square Boxes and Accessories 4" Square Boxes Continued Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Bottom Std. No. Clamps Brkts. Conduit Cable Conduit Ctn. A Steel City N* BN* B bracket mounted flush MSN* MS bracket for 1e", 2d", 3e", 4", 6" metal studs VN* SV bracket mounted flush 1d" deep with nonmetallic sheathed cable clamps 21.0 cubic inch capacity N** C-5 2 d" 2 1 d" 50 1 d" & f"e MSN** C-5 MS 2 d" 2 1 d" 25 1 d" & f"e BN** C-5 B 2 d" 2 1 d" 25 1 d" & f"e VN** C-5 SV 2 1d" 2 1 d" 25 1 d" & f"e CVN** C-5 CV 2 d" 2 1 d" 25 1 d" & f"e CVNP C-5 CV 2 d" 2 1 d" 25 1 d" & f"e 1d" deep with armored cable/metal clad clamps 21.0 cubic inch capacity CVN* CV bracket mounted flush CVNP NEW X** C-3 2 d" 2 1 d" 50 1 d" & f"e XP** C-3 2 d" 2 1 d" 50 1 d" & f"e BX** C-3 B 2 d" 2 1 d" 25 1 d" & f"e VX** C-3 SV 2 d" 2 1 d" 25 1 d" & f"e CVX** C-3 CV 2 d" 2 1 d" 25 1 d" & f"e MSX** C-3 MS 2 d" 2 1 d" 25 1 d" & f"e X* XP* ** Per U.L. 514-A, suitable for use without a bonding jumper in circuits above or below 250 volts. * All Bracketed Boxes come complete with eccentric knockouts. Pigtail wire is #12 AWG insulated, 10d" long BX* B bracket mounted flush VX* SV bracket mounted flush CVX* CV bracket mounted flush MSX* MS bracket for 1e", 2d", 3e", 4", 6" metal studs 2003 Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice. A21

186 A Steel City Square Boxes and Accessories 4" Square Boxes Continued Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Bottom Std. No. Clamps Brkts. Conduit Cable Conduit Ctn / V-1/2 & 3/4** SV bracket mounted flush CV-3/ CV-1/2 & 3/4** CV bracket mounted flush CV-1/2 & 3/4-EP /2 & 3/4-E /2 & 3/4-EGB NEW NEW 2a" deep with conduit KOs 30.3 cubic inch capacity /4 2 f" 2 f" 3 d" 50 2 f" " 2 1" 3 d" 50 2 f" V-1/2 & 3/4* SV 2 d" 2 d" 3 d" 25 1 d" 1 d" 2 d" & f"e & f"e & f"e CV-1/2 & 3/4* CV 2 d" 2 d" 3 d" 25 1 d" 1 d" 2 d" & f"e & f"e & f"e CV-3/4 2 f" 2 f" 3 d" 25 2 f" CV-1/2 & 3/4EP* CV 2 d" 2 d" 3 d" 25 1 d" 1 1d" 2 d" & f"e & f"e & f"e /2 & 3/4-E 2 d" 2 d" 3 d" 50 1 d" 1 d" 2 d" & f"e & f"e & f"e /2 & 3/4-EGB CV 2 d" 2 d" 2 d" 25 (Ground Bump) 1 d" 1 d" 2 d" & f"e & f"e & f"e /2 & 3/4-EGBP 2 d" 2 d" 2 d" 50 (Ground Bump with 1 d" 1 d" 2 d" 10d" Ground Wire) & f"e & f"e & f"e MS-1/2 & 3/4* MS 2 d" 2 d" 3 d" 25 1 d" 1 d" 2 d" & f"e & f"e & f"e NEW NEW 2a" deep with nonmetallic sheathed cable clamps 30.3 cubic inch capacity N C-5 2 d" 2 1 d" 25 1 d" & f"e VN* C-5 SV 2 d" 2 1 d" 25 1 d" & f"e MS-1/2 & 3/4** MS bracket for 1e", 2d", 3e", 4", 6" metal studs N** NEW 2a" deep for armored cable and metal clad cable clamps 30.3 cubic inch capacity X* C-3 2 d" 2 1 d" 25 1 d" & f"e MSX* C-3 MS 2 d" 2 1 d" 25 1 d" & f"e CVX* C-3 CV-2 d f" EW-SSX C-3 SSX 25 * Per U.L. 514-A, suitable for use without a bonding jumper in circuits above or below 250 volts. * All Bracketed Boxes come complete with eccentric knockouts. Pigtail wire is #12 AWG insulated, 10d" long VN** SV bracket mounted flush X** MSX** MS bracket for 1e", 2d", 3e", 4", 6" metal studs CVX* EW-SSX A Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

187 Square Boxes and Accessories 4" Square Thru-Wall Box Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Std. No. Conduit Conduit Ctn. A Steel City X1-1/2-1/2 & 3/4 1d" deep with conduit KOs 21.0 cubic inch capacity X1-1/2 & 3/4 2 d", 1 f" 2 d", 1 f" 25 4" Square Two-Device Boxes Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Bottom Std. No. Brkts. Conduit Conduit Conduit Ctn. 2G4D-1/2 & 3/4 2G4D-V-1/2 & 3/4 CV bracket recessed g" 2a" deep with conduit KOs 30.3 cubic inch capacity 2G4D-1/2 & 3/4 2 d", 1 f" 2 d", 1 f" 3 d", 2 f" 25 2G4DV-1/2 & 3/4 CV 2 d", 1 f" 2 d", 1 f" 3 d", 2 f" 25 3G4D-1/2 3G4D-B-1/2 3 and 4 Gang Drawn-Style Device Boxes Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Std. No. Brkts. Conduit Conduit Ctn. 2a" deep 3 gang cubic inch, 4 gang cubic inch 3G4D-1/2 3 d" 2 d" 20 3G4D-B-1/2 B 3 d" 2 d" 20 3G4D-V-1/2 CV 3 d" 2 d" 20 4G4D-1/2 4 d" 2 d" 20 4G4D-B-1/2 B 4 d" 2 d" 20 4G4D-V-1/2 CV 4 d" 2 d" 20 3G4D-V-1/2 4G4D-1/2 4G4D-B-1/2 4G4D-V-1/2 4" Square Extension Rings Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Std. No. Conduit Conduit Ctn / / /2 & 3/ /2 & 3/4-UB** 1d" deep with conduit KOs 21.0 cubic inch capacity /2 3 d" 3 d" /4 2 f" 2 f" /2 & 3/4 2 d" 2 d" 50 1 f" 1 f" /2 & 3/4-UB* 2 d" 2 d" 50 1 d" & f"e 2a" deep with conduit KOs 30.3 cubic inch capacity /2 & 3/4* 2 d" 2 d" 25 1 d" 1 f" & f"e " 2 1" 25 ** Per U.L. 514-A, suitable for use without a bonding jumper in circuits above or below 250 volts. ** ECC, KO s on sides /2 & 3/4** Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice. A23

188 A Steel City Square Boxes and Accessories Pre-Fabricated Box and Cover Assemblies Combinations of popular boxes, brackets and covers. Pre-installed 10d" insulated Pigtails. Single and two device covers. Raised d", e" and f". 1d" and 2a" box depths. Save installation time. New Products Box Support Covers Steel City Box Support covers combine a box-to-stud mounting bracket with a device cover in one, easy-to-use product. Designed for use with 4" square boxes, Steel City Box Support Covers can be used with both steel and wood studs. Cat. Cu. In. Std. No. Raised # of Devices Cap. Ctn. 52CM13 d", e" and f" Raised covers for single or two devices. 52CM13 d" CM14-5/8 e" CM14 f" Two Device 52CMD17 d" CMD18-5/8 e" CMD18 f" * Drawn style. 52CMD17 Combines cover and bracket in one component. Available in one and two device versions. 1 2", 5 8" and 3 4" raised covers. Speeds installation time. Needs no far side support. Can be used with both steel and wood stud. Can be used without a box as a low voltage device support. UL and CSA Listed. UL File #E2969. CSA File #LR5043. New Products Box, Grounding Pigtail and Box Support Cover Pre-Fabricated Assemblies Box Pigtail Box Support Cat. Type Box Type Cover No.of Std. No. Included Depth Included Included Raised Devices Ctn CM13 52CM and 52CMD Box Support Covers " insulated Pigtail. One and two device covers. Raised 1 2", 5 8" and 3 4" " and 2 1 8" box depths CM EW 1d" GSC12 52CM13 d" CM14-5/ EW 1d" GSC12 52CM14-5/8 e" CM EW 1d" GSC12 52CM14 f" CMD EW 1d" GSC12 52CMD17 d" CMD18-5/ EW 1d" GSC12 52CMD18-5/8 e" CMD EW 1d" GSC12 52CMD18 f" CM E 2a" GSC12 52CM13 d" CM14-5/ E 2a" GSC12 52CM14-5/8 e" CM E 2a" GSC12 52CM14 f" CMD E 2a" GSC12 52CMD17 d" CMD18-5/ E 2a" GSC12 52CMD18-5/8 e" CMD E 2a" GSC12 52CMD18 f" 2 25 A Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

189 Square Boxes and Accessories 151-SH SSF-SH2346 Bracket " insulated Pigtail. One and two device covers. Raised 1 2", 5 8" and 3 4" " and 2 1 8" box depths. New Products Box, Grounding Pigtail, Box to Stud Bracket and Raised Cover Pre-Fabricated Assemblies Box Pigtail Bracket Cover Cat. Type Box Type Type Type No.of Std. No. Included Depth Included Included Included Raised Devices Ctn. 151-SH EW 1d" GSC12 SSF-SH C-13 d" SH EW 1d" GSC12 SSF-SH C-14-5/8 e" SH EW 1d" GSC12 SSF-SH C-14 f" SH EW 1d" GSC12 SSF-SH C d" SH EW 1d" GSC12 SSF-SH C-18-5/8-25 e" SH EW 1d" GSC12 SSF-SH C-18 f" SH E 2a" GSC12 SSF-SH C-13 d" SH E 2a" GSC12 SSF-SH C-14-5/8 e" SH E 2a" GSC12 SSF-SH C-14 f" SH E 2a" GSC12 SSF-SH C d" SH E 2a" GSC12 SSF-SH C-18-5/8-25 e" SH E 2a" GSC12 SSF-SH C-18 f" 2 10 A Steel City New Products Box, Grounding Pigtail, 12" Vertical Mount Bracket and Raised Cover Pre-Fabricated Assemblies Box Pigtail Bracket Cover Cat. Type Box Type Type Type No.of Std. No. Included Depth Included Included Included Raised Devices Ctn. 151-SV12-13 SSF-SV12-12" Vertical Bracket " insulated Pigtail. One and two device covers. Raised 1 2", 5 8" and 3 4" " and 2 1 8" box depths. 151-SV EW 1d" GSC12 SSF-SV12 52-C-13 d" SV EW 1d" GSC12 SSF-SV12 52-C-14-5/8 e" SV EW 1d" GSC12 SSF-SV12 52-C-14 f" SV EW 1d" GSC12 SSF-SV12 52-C d" SV EW 1d" GSC12 SSF-SV12 52-C-18-5/8-25 e" SV EW 1d" GSC12 SSF-SV12 52-C-18 f" SV E 2a" GSC12 SSF-SV12 52-C-13 d" SV E 2a" GSC12 SSF-SV12 52-C-14-5/8 e" SV E 2a" GSC12 SSF-SV12 52-C-14 f" SV E 2a" GSC12 SSF-SV12 52-C d" SV E 2a" GSC12 SSF-SV12 52-C-18-5/8-25 e" SV E 2a" GSC12 SSF-SV12 52-C-18 f" 2 10 New Products Box, Grounding Pigtail, 18" Vertical Mount Bracket and Raised Cover Pre-Fabricated Assemblies Box Pigtail Bracket Cover Cat. Type Box Type Type Type No.of Std. No. Included Depth Included Included Included Raised Devices Ctn. 151-SV18-13 SSF-SV18-18" Vertical Bracket " insulated Pigtail. One and two device covers. Raised 1 2", 5 8" and 3 4" " and 2 1 8" box depths. 151-SV EW 1d" GSC12 SSF-SV18 52-C-13 d" SV EW 1d" GSC12 SSF-SV18 52-C-14-5/8 e" SV EW 1d" GSC12 SSF-SV18 52-C-14 f" SV EW 1d" GSC12 SSF-SV18 52-C d" SV EW 1d" GSC12 SSF-SV18 52-C-18-5/8-25 e" SV EW 1d" GSC12 SSF-SV18 52-C-18 f" SV E 2a" GSC12 SSF-SV18 52-C-13 d" SV E 2a" GSC12 SSF-SV18 52-C-14-5/8 e" SV E 2a" GSC12 SSF-SV18 52-C-14 f" SV E 2a" GSC12 SSF-SV18 52-C d" SV E 2a" GSC12 SSF-SV18 52-C-18-5/8-25 e" SV E 2a" GSC12 SSF-SV18 52-C-18 f" Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice. A25

190 A Steel City Square Boxes and Accessories /2 & 3/4-EWP Popular 4" Square Boxes and Switch Boxes. Pre-Insalled " Insulated Pigtails. New Products Boxes with Pre-Installed Pigtails Box Pigtail Cat. Type Type Std. No. Included Included Ctn /2 & 3/4-EWP EW 10d" /2 & 3/4-P d" /2 & 3/4-EP E 10d" XP 52151X 10d" CVNP 52151CVN 10d" 25 LXWOWP LXWOW-25 10d" 25 LXVP LXV-25 10d" 25 CXWOWP CXWOW 10d" 25 CXWVP CXWV 10d" 25 CXP CX 10d" 25 4" Square Covers Cat. Cu. In. Std. No. Raised Description Cap. Ctn. 52-C-1 52-C-6 52-C-3 52-C-1 Flat, blank C-3-25 e" Center blanked with tapped ears on 2f" centers C-3-1/2-25 d" Center blanked with tapped ears on 2f" centers C-3-3/4 f" Center blanked with tapped ears on 2z" centers C-3-1 1" Center blanked with tapped ears on 2z" centers C-3-1-1/4 1a" Center blanked with tapped ears on 2z" centers C-6 Flat, with d" KO 100 Swivel Hangers Cat. Bar Lgth. Slot Std. No. (in.) Description (in.) Ctn. SH 1/2 & 3/4 Swivel Hanger for 4" Square Boxes 25 UL Listed for 50 lb. Fixture Support. SH 1/2 & 3/4 4" Square Device Covers Cat. Cu. In. Std. No. Raised Description Cap. Ctn. 52-C-0 52-C C C-36 For single device 52-C-0 Flat C-62 b" Keyed for plaster C-10 b" Offset, keyed for plaster C-13 d" C-14 f" C-14-5/8 e" C-15 1" C-16 1b" C-36 b" For dry wall construction A Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

191 Square Boxes and Accessories 4" Square Device Covers Cat. Cu. In. Std. No. Raised Description Cap. Ctn. A Steel City 52-C C C-17 For two devices 52-C-00 Flat C b" C d" C-18 f" C-18-5/8-25 e" For dry wall construction C-19 1" C-21 1a" C-37 a" For Swivel Covers see Accessories Section on pages A16 and A C-49-1/2 52-C-52-1/2 52-C /2 4" Square Cut Tile Wall Covers Cat. Cu. In. Std. No. Raised Description Cap. Ctn. For single device steel 52-C-49-1/2* d" C-49-3/4* f" C-49-1* 1" C /4 1b" C /2-25 1d" C " For two devices steel 52-C-52-1/2 d" C-52-3/4 f" Square corners C " facilitate tile C /4 1b" installation C /2 1d" C "} *Drawn style. 52-PS-1 52-PS-2 4" Square Box Partitions Cat. Std. No. Description Ctn. For 1d" deep box with square cut tile wall two-device covers 52-PS-1 For d", f" and 1" raised covers PS-2 For 1b", 1d" and 2" raised covers 25 For 2a" deep box with square cut tile wall two-device covers 52-PD-1 For d", f" and 1" raised covers PD-2 For 1b", 1d" and 2" raised covers PD-1 52-PD Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice. A27

192 A Steel City Square Boxes and Accessories 4" Square Surface Covers Cat. Dia. Hole Std. No. (in.) Description Ctn. RS-1 RS-3 RS-5 RS-9 RS-2 RS-4 RS-8 RS-10 d" deep 5.0 cubic inch capacity RS-1 1u For one toggle switch and one single flush receptacle 50 RS-2* For one toggle switch and one duplex flush receptacle 50 RS-3* 1u For one single and one duplex flush receptacle 50 RS-4 1x For one 4-wire twist-lock single receptacle 50 RS-5 For two toggle switches 50 RS-8* For two duplex, flush receptacles 50 RS-9 For one toggle switch 50 RS-10 1u For two single, flush receptacles 50 RS-11 1u For one single, flush receptacle 50 RS-12* For one duplex, flush receptacle 50 RS-13 2q For one 30 or 50 amp. dryer or range receptacle 50 Cat. Die Hole For Recept. Std. No. (in.) No. Amps Wire Ctn. 1d" deep 5.0 cubic inch capacity RS-14 2v RS-15 1f" For # A 250 V twist-lock receptacle 50 RS-16-CC For one ground fault receptacle 25 RS-17-CC For two ground fault receptacles 25 RS-18-CC For one ground fault receptacle and one toggle switch 25 RS-19-CC* For one ground fault receptacle and one duplex receptacle 25 Remove portion of G.F.I. receptacle ear to mount receptacle to cover. Screws captivated. * Now manufactured to meet new code C4 and to conform to the 1996 N.E.C. change. RS-11 RS-12 RS-13 RS-14 RS-15 RS-16-CC RS-17-CC RS-18-CC RS-19-CC A Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

193 Square Boxes and Accessories 4L" Square Boxes Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Bottom Std. No. Conduit Conduit Conduit Ctn. A Steel City /2 & 3/4-E /4 & /4 1d" deep with conduit KO s 29.5 cubic inch capacity /2 & 3/4"-E* 3 d" & f"-e 2 d" & f"-e 2 d" & f"-e 20 4 d" 2a" deep with conduit KO s 42.0 cubic inch capacity * 2 1" 2 1" 3 d", 2 f" /4 & 1* 1 f", 1 1" 1 f", 1 1" 3 d", 2 3f" & 1/4* 2 1b" 1 1b" 3 d", 2 f" CV-1/2 & 3/4* 2 d", 1 f" 2 d", 1 f" 3 d", 2 f" /2 & 3/4-E* 3 d", & f"-e 3 d", & f"-e 2 d", & f"-e 20 3d" MS-1/2 & 3/4* 3 d", & f"-e 3 d", & f"-e 2 d", & f"-e 25 3 d" * Per U.L. 514-A, suitable for use without a bonding jumper in circuits above or below 250 volts MS-1/2 & 3/4 MS bracket for 1e", 2d", 3e", 4", 6" metal studs CV-1/2 & 3/ /2 & 3/4-E 4L" Square Box Extension Rings Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Std. No. Conduit Conduit Ctn /2 & 3/ /2 & 3/4 1d" deep with conduit KO s 29.5 cubic inch capacity /2 & 3/4* 2 d" 2 d" 20 1 f" 1 f" 2a" deep with conduit KO s 42.0 cubic inch capacity /2 & 3/4* 2 d" 2 d" 20 1 f" 1 d" " 2 1" 20 * Per U.L. 514-A, suitable for use without a bonding jumper in circuits above or below 250 volts Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice. A29

194 A Steel City Square Boxes and Accessories 72-C-1 72-C-6 4L" Square Covers Cat. Cu. In. Std. No. Raised Description Cap. Ctn. 72-C-1 Flat blank C-6 } Flat with d" KO C-3 e" Center blanked C-3-1/2 d" with tapped ears C-3-3/4 f" on 2z" centers C-3-1 1" C-3 72-C C C C-21 4L" Square Device Covers Cat. Cu. In. Std. No. Raised Cap. Ctn. For single device 72-C-62 b" C-13 d" C-14 f" C-14-5/8 e" C-15 1" C-16 1b" For two devices 72-C-17 d" C-18 f" C-18-5/8 e" C-19 1" C-21 1b" C-49-3/4 72-C-52-3/4 72-C /2 72-C /2 4L" Square Cut Tile Wall Covers Cat. Cu. In. Std. No. Raised Description Cap. Ctn. For single device steel 72-C-49-1/2 d" C-49-3/4 f" C " C /4 1b" C /2 1d" C " For two devices steel 72-C-52-1/2 d" C-52-3/4 f" Square corners C " facilitate tile C /4 1b" installation C /2 1d" C "} A Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

195 Square Boxes and Accessories 4L" Square Box Partitions Cat. Std. No. Description Ctn. A Steel City 72-PS-1 72-PS-2 For 1d" deep box with square cut tile wall two-device covers 72-PS-1 For d", f" and 1" raised covers PS-2 For 1b", 1d" and 2" raised covers 25 For 2a" deep box with square cut tile wall two-device covers 72-PD-1 For d", f" and 1" raised covers PD-2 For 1b", 1d" and 2" raised covers PD-1 72-PD-2 RSL-2 RSL-5 RSL-9 RSL-4 RSL-8 RSL-11 4L" Square Surface Covers Cat. Dia. Hole Std. No. (in.) Description Ctn. d" deep 7.5 cubic inch capacity RSL-2* For one toggle switch and one duplex flush receptacle 10 RSL-4 1x" For one 4-wire twist-lock single receptacle 10 RSL-5 For two toggle switches 10 RSL-8* For two duplex, flush receptacles 10 RSL-9 For one toggle switch 10 RSL-11 1u" For one single, flush receptacle 10 RSL-12* For one duplex, flush receptacle 10 RSL-13 2q" For one 30 to 50 amp. dryer or range receptacle 10 d" deep 7.5 cubic inch capacity Cat. Dia. Hole For Recept. Std. No. (in.) No. Amps Wire Ctn. RSL-14 2v" RSL-15 1f" For # A 250 V twist-lock receptacle 10 RSL-16 For one ground fault receptacle 10 RSL-17 For two ground fault receptacles 10 RSL-18 For one ground fault receptacle and one toggle switch 10 RSL-19* For one ground fault receptacle and one duplex receptacle 10 * Now manufactured to meet new code C4 and to conform to the 1996 N.E.C. change. RSL-12 RSL-13 RSL-14 RSL-15 RSL-16 RSL-17 RSL-18 RSL Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice. A31

196 A Steel City Utility Boxes and Accessories 4" x 2a" Utility Boxes Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Bottom Std. No. Brkts. Conduit Conduit Conduit Ctn / B-1/4 B bracket recessed b" / /4 1d" deep with conduit KOs 10.3 cubic inch capacity /2* 3 d" 1 d" 2 d" B-1/4 B 3 d" 1 d" 2 d" 25 1g" deep with conduit KOs 13.0 cubic inch capacity /2* 3 d" 1 d" 2 d" /4 2 f" 1 f" 2 f" V-1/2* CV 3 d" 1 d" 2 d" 50 2a" deep with conduit KOs 14.5 cubic inch capacity /2* 3 d" 1 d" 2 d" /4 2 f" 1 f" 2 f" T-1/2* T 3 d" 1 d" 2 d" V-1/2-25* CV 3 d" 1 d" 2 d" 25 * Factory provided raised ground screw location V-1/2 CV bracket recessed d" / / T-1/2 T bracket recessed e" V-1/2 CV bracket recessed d" 4" x 2a" Utility Box Extension Rings Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Std. No. Conduit Conduit Ctn / /4 1g" deep with conduit KOs 13.0 cubic inch capacity /2 3 d" 1 d" /4 2 f" 1 f" 25 A Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

197 Utility Boxes and Accessories 4" x 2a" Utility Box Covers Cat. Dia. Hole Std. No. (in.) Description Ctn. A Steel City 58-C-1 58-C-4 58-C-5 Raised b" 58-C-1 Blank C-4 1x" For 4-wire twist-lock single flush receptacle C-5 1u" For single receptacle C-6 With d" KO C-7 For duplex flush receptacle C-11 With v" bushed hole C-16 For single GFCI receptacle C-30 For one toggle switch 100 NC501-SC d" Romex Clamp Hit Lock Connector C-6 58-C-7 58-C-11 Includes captivated Phillips head screws C C NC501-SC 4a" x 2d" Utility Boxes Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Bottom Std. No. Conduit Conduit Conduit Ctn / /2 1n" deep with conduit KOs 17.0 cubic inch capacity /2* 3 d" 1 d" 2 d" 25 2l" deep with conduit KOs 18.8 cubic inch capacity /2* 3 d" 1 d" 2 d" 50 * Factory provided raised ground screw location. 4a" x 2d" Utility Box Covers Raised i" Cat. Dia. Hole Std. No. (in.) Description Ctn. 68-C-1 68-C-5 68-C-6 68-C-1 Blank C-5 1u" For single receptacle C-6 With d" KO C-7 For duplex flush receptacle C-30 For one toggle switch 25 Includes captivated Phillips head screws. 68-C-7 68-C Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice. A33

198 A Steel City Gang Boxes and Accessories 3G-1/2 & 3/4 5G-1/2 & 3/4 H3-BD-3/4 & 1 Gang Boxes Knockouts Cat. Ea. Side Ea. End Bottom Cu. In. Std. No. Lgth. Conduit Conduit Conduit Cap. Ctn. 4d" high 1e" deep with conduit KOs 2G-1/2 & 3/4 6m" 2 d" 1 d" 3 d" f" 1 f" 2 f" 3G-1/2 & 3/4 8e" 3 d" 1 d" 6 d" f" 1 f" 4 f" 4G-1/2 & 3/4 10k" 3 d" 1 d" 6 d" f" 1 f" 4 f" 5G-1/2 & 3/4 12b" 4 d" 1 d" 6 d" f" 1 f" 4 f" 6G-1/2 & 3/4 14h" 4 d" 1 d" 6 d" f" 1 f" 4 f" 4d" high 2d" deep with conduit KOs H2BD-3/4 & 1 6m" 2 f" 1 f" 3 d" " 1 1" 2 f" H3BD-3/4 & 1 8e" 4 f" 1 f" 6 d" " 1 1" 4 f" H4BD-3/4 & 1 10k" 2 f" 1 f" 6 d" " 1 1" 4 f" H5BD-3/4 & 1 12b" 3 f" 1 f" 6 d" " 1 1" 4 f" H6BD-3/4 & 1 14h" 3 f" 1 f" 6 d" " 1 1" 4 f" H5-BD-3/4 & 1 SGP DGP Gang Box Partitions Cat. Std. No. Description Ctn. SGP Hi-low voltage partition for 1e" deep box 25 DGP Hi-low voltage partition for 2d" deep box 50 A Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

199 Gang Boxes and Accessories 3-GC 6-GC 3-GCB Gang Box Covers Cat. Lgth. Cu. In. Std. No. (in.) Description Cap. Ctn. 4L" wide raised n" for plaster 2-GC 7 Holes between gangs are spaced on 1i" centers; tapped holes in ears spaced on 3s" 3-GC 8m centers to accommodate all standard receptacles GC 10e and switches; furnished with extra plugged screw GC 12k holes; if these screw holes are used, the cover GC 14b will fit the next smaller size box L" wide flat, blank 2-GCB GCB 8m 25 4-GCB 10e 25 5-GCB 12k 25 6-GCB 14b 25 4L" wide flat for toggle switches 2-GCS 7 For 2 toggle switches 25 3-GCS 8m For 3 toggle switches 25 4-GCS 10e For 4 toggle switches 25 5-GCS 12k For 5 toggle switches 25 6-GCS 14b For 6 toggle switches 25 4L" wide special covers flat to accommodate combinations of devices. When covers are required to accommodate various combinations of devices, use the above catalog numbers plus the suffix SPECIAL and then indicate the combinations desired. When necessary, also indicate the sequence of devices. A Steel City 5-GCB 4-GCS 6-GCS EXAMPLE: 4GCS Special As illustrated above this is a 4-GCS Special for two toggle switches on left side and two duplex receptacles on right side Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice. A35

200 A Steel City Concrete Boxes and Accessories 4" Octagon Concrete Boxes Cat. Cu. In. Depth Std. No. Cap. (In.) Knockouts Ctn /2 & 3/ /2 & 3/ /2 & 3/ /4 & / /2 & 3/ /4 & /2 & 3/ /4 & 1 With conduit KOs /2 & 3/ d" & f" single row /2 & 3/ d d" & f" single row /2 & 3/ d" & f" single row /4 & f" & 1" single row / d d" double row /2 & 3/ d d" & f" double row /4 & d f" & 1" double row /2 & 3/ d" & f" double row /4 & f" & 1" double row /2 & 3/ d" & f" double row /2 & 3/ d" & f" three rows /2 & 3/ /2 & 3/4 4" Octagon Hanging Ceiling Boxes Cat. Std. No. Knockouts Ctn. 3d" deep with conduit KOs 41.0 cubic inch capacity H /2 & 3/4 d" & f" double row 20 H /4 f" double row 20 H /2 & 3/4 Two bars required for each box. Bars for Hanging Ceiling Boxes Cat. Std. No. Length Ctn. HBB-18 18" 40 HBB-24 24" 40 HBB-30 30" 40 CBP CBP-3/8 Concrete Box Cover Plate Cat. Std. No. Description Ctn. CBP No Stud. 3-d" and 2-f" KOs 25 CBP-3/8 With c" fixture stud; 2-d" and 2-f" KOs 25 Thread size NPS CBA Concrete Box Adapter Cat. Std. No. Description Ctn. CBA For quick mounting and alignment of 4" octagon 25 extension ring on concrete box or hung ceiling box A Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

201 Gangable Masonry Boxes/Thru-Wall Boxes Gangable Masonry Boxes Eccentric Knockouts d" & f" Cat. Cu. Lgth. In. Ea. Ea. Std. No. In. Cap. Side End Bottom Ctn. A Steel City GW-135-G GW-235-G 2d" deep 3f" high with eccentric conduit KOs GW-125-G* 1n GW-225-G* 3f GW-325-G* 5l GW-425-G 7c GW-525-G 9i GW-625-G* d" deep 3f" high with eccentric conduit KOs GW-135-G* 1n GW-235-G* 3f GW-335-G 5l GW-435-G* 7c GW-535-G 9i GW-635-G* * Per N.E.C. suitable for use without a bonding jumper in circuits above or below 250 volts. 4, 5, and 6 gang supplied with partitions. PGW-25 PGW-35 Masonry Box Partitions Cat. Std. No. Description Ctn. PGW-25-G Nonmetallic partition for 2d" deep steel tile wall boxes 25 PGW-35-G Nonmetallic partition for 3d" deep steel tile wall boxes 25 CBTW-4 CBTW-6 Thru-Wall Boxes for Concrete Block Knockouts Cat. Depth Cu. In. Ea. Side Ea. End Std. No. (in.) Cap. Conduit Conduit Ctn. 2a" wide x 3L" long with conduit KOs CBTW-4 3d d" f" 1 d" f" 10 concentric concentric CBTW-6 5d d" f" 2 d" f" 10 concentric concentric CBTW-8 7d d" f" 3 d" f" 10 concentric concentric CBTW Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice. A37

202 A Steel City Adj. Bar Hangers/Box Accessories Packaged Complete With Either Adjustable Bar Hangers For Plaster and Drywall Depth of Cat. End Plate Bar Lgth. Stud or Std. No. (in.) (in.) Fastener Ctn. Fastener or Stud Ease of Installation: Claws provide temporary support for proper positioning until permanently installed. For c", d" and e" wall board and plaster 50 lb max load rating 6010-DW-25 1i 10d-18d Stud ADW-25 1i 14d-26d Stud DW-25 1i 10d-18d Fastener ADW-25 1i 14d-26d Fastener 25 *Score marks for drywall and plaster depths. d", f", g" LATH and PLASTER c", d", e" DRYWALL BOARD Two Adjustable Lengths 1d" deep box without cover 1d" deep box without cover 10d" to 18d" Accurate and Automatic Positioning On Joist Foot straightened gauges for 1 1 2" deep box with cover or 2 1 8" deep box without cover. With foot broken off gauges for shallow pan box. 14d" to 26d" Endplate locator tab is scored and marked for lath and plaster drywall applications with standard and deep boxes. Box Supports Cat. Bar Lgth. Slot Std. No. (in.) Description (in.) Ctn SS-1-TB Box and conduit supports n" long with 4-d" & 3-n" KOs n" long with 5-f" KOs 25 Side Support SS-1-TB Side support prevents the box from falling back 500 into the wall when installing devices; designed as standard for 3e" metal studs; can be adapted for 1e", 2d", and 4", and metal studs Box brace 50-SC Box brace for 4" square or octagon box 500 Footed box supports SC 8" Slot Key Hole Can be mounted on metal or wood studding. Used as conduit rack or spacer for rigid conduit, I.M.C. or E.M.T. Ideal for schools, hospitals, industrial and commercial jobs. Galvanized " No or 30" No Box fastens at side or back A Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

203 Box Accessories SH 1/2 & 3/4 SHR 1/2 & 3/4 Swivel Hangers Cat. Bar Lgth. Slot Std. No. (in.) Description (in.) Ctn. SH 1 2 & 3 4 Swivel Hanger for 4" Square Boxes 25 SHR 1 2 & 3 4 Swivel Hanger for 4 Octagonal Boxes 25 UL Listed for 50 lb. Fixture Support. A Steel City Channel Bar Cat. Min. Order Std. No. Description (ft.) Ctn. Mounts fixtures, boxes and conduits in suspended ceilings 6013* Single channel bar * Single channel bar * 16 ga. (.060") Ribbed H* 16 ga. (.060") Ribbed with holes for #12 sheet metal screw and b" threaded rod *10 Ft. Lengths 6029-H Box and Channel Fasteners Cat. Min. Order Std. No. Description Pcs. Ctn. 6015** Stud and carrier c-18 NPS Treading ** Fastener and carrier ** Beam flange clip ** Joiner for 6029 channel ** Minimum Order 100 Pieces Beam Flange Clip 6026 Joiner for ribbed channel 2003 Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice. A39

204 A Steel City Box Accessories GEE For grounding switch and outlet boxes using nonmetallic sheathed cables with ground wire. Grounds #12 and #14 copper and #12 aluminum conductors. GSC-12 GSC-14 GSC-12-S GSC-14-S Grounding Devices Cat. Std. Unit No. Description Ctn. Pkg. Grounding clip GEE Zinc plated, spring steel, colored green 1000 Accommodates #12 and #14 copper and #12 aluminum solid conductors in nonmetallic sheathed cable. Also approved for connecting bonding jumper from receptacle to grounded metal device box. 50 per unit package. Grounding screws and pigtails GSC x c slotted hexagon head washer face ground screw with green dye finish and a six inch solid copper #12 A.W.G. insulated wire. GSC-12-S #12 A.W.G. insulated eight inch stranded pigtail with a captive x c round head screw on one end and a fork tongue terminal on the other end. GSC x c slotted hexagon head washer face ground screw with green dye finish and a six inch solid copper #14 A.W.G. insulated wire GSC-14-S #14 A.W.G. insulated eight inch stranded pigtail with a captive x c round head screw on one end and a fork tongue terminal on the other end. GSB x c slotted hexagon head washer face ground screw with green dye finish and a six inch solid copper #12 A.W.G. bare wire. GSB x c slotted hexagon head washer face ground screw with green dye finish and a six inch solid copper #14 A.W.G. bare wire. GS-1-SC x c slotted hexagon head washer face screw with green dye finish. Provides positive ground continuity in boxes with a #10-32 tapped hole. GSB-12 GSB-14 GS-1-SC A prelooped 6" long bare or insulated copper ground wire attached to a x c" hexagon head washer face screw, colored green. Catalog No. GSC-12#12 A.W.G. Insulated Catalog No. GSC-14#14 A.W.G. Insulated Catalog No. GSB-12#12 A.W.G. Bare Catalog No. GSB-14#14 A.W.G. Bare Eight inch stranded pigtail is also available with a captive x c round head screw on one end and a fork tongue terminal on the other end. Catalog No. GSC-12-S#12 A.W.G. Insulated Catalog No. GSC-14-S#14 A.W.G. Insulated A t x c" slotted hexagon head washer face screw, colored green. Catalog No. GS-1. Cable Protector Cat.No. Description Ctn. CP-1 Protects nonmetallic sheathed cables or raceway 100 type wires running through wood studs, joists, rafters or similar structural wood members from accidental nail, screw or drill penetration; no nails required. CP-1 A Thomas & Betts Corporation. Specifications are subject to change without notice.

205 Type 4 Enclosures Type 4 Single-Door Enclosures Data Sheet Type 4 Enclosures Application Houses electrical controls and instruments Intended for indoor or outdoor use Protects against windblown dust and rain, splashing water and hose directed water Standards UL 508 listed, Type 4, Type 13 and Type 12 CSA C22.2 No.94 certified, Type 4, Type 13 and Type 12 Conforms to NEMA standard for Type 4, Type 13 and Type 12 Conforms to JIC standard EGP IEC 60529, IP66 Construction Enclosure and door are fabricated from code gauge steel, (see table) All continuous welded seams are finished smooth Doors are secured to the body with a heavy-duty continuous hinge on one side and easy-to-release stainless steel door clamps mounted to the other three sides Ground stud provided on door Formed lip around enclosure opening diverts liquids and contaminants Each door has a padlock hasp with sealing hole provision Print pocket provided Door has a fixed, oil and water-resistant gasket collar studs are provided for mounting optional panel External mounting feet are provided for secure wall mounting Finish Wash and phosphate undercoat ANSI 61 gray polyester powder finish Accessories Panels NEMA terminal strap kit Terminal blocks Door lock kit Floor stand kit Touch-up paint See Accessories section Notes: Cooper B-Line can provide special sizes, finishes and other modifications. Consult the factory for your special requirements. 154

206 Type 4 Enclosures Type 4 Single-Door Enclosures Catalog Number Enclosure Enclosure Size Panel Panel Size Height x Width x Depth A x B x C Height x Width Catalog Number in. mm Gauge Catalog Number in. mm x12.00x x305x AW1612P 13.00x x x16.00x x406x AW1616P 13.00x x x20.00x x508x AW2016P 13.00x x x16.00x x406x AW2016P 17.00x x x20.00x x508x AW2020P 17.00x x x12.00x x305x AW2412P 21.00x x x16.00x x406x AW2416P 21.00x x x20.00x x508x AW2420P 20.87x x x24.00x x610x AW2424P 20.87x x x20.00x x508x AW3020P 26.87x x x24.00x x610x AW3024P 26.87x x x24.00x x610x AW3624P 32.87x x x12.00x x305x AW1612P 13.00x x x16.00x x406x AW2016P 17.00x x x20.00x x508x AW2020P 17.00x x x24.00x x610x AW2024P 16.87x x x20.00x x508x AW2420P 20.87x x x24.00x x610x AW2424P 20.87x x x30.00x x762x AW3024P 20.87x x x20.00x x508x AW3020P 26.87x x x24.00x x610x AW3024P 26.87x x x30.00x x762x AW3030P 26.87x x x24.00x x610x AW3624P 32.87x x x30.00x x762x AW3630P 32.87x x x30.00x x762x AW4230P 38.87x x x36.00x x914x AW4236P 38.87x x x36.00x x914x AW4836P 44.87x x x36.00x x914x AW6036P 56.87x x x16.00x x406x AW2016P 17.00x x x20.00x x508x AW2420P 20.87x x x24.00x x610x AW3024P 26.87x x x30.00x x762x AW3630P 32.87x x x30.00x x762x AW4830P 44.87x x x36.00x x914x AW4836P 44.87x x x36.00x x914x AW6036P 56.87x x x24.00x x610x AW3024P 26.87x x x30.00x x762x AW3630P 32.87x x x36.00x x914x AW4836P 44.87x x x30.00x x762x AW3630P 32.87x x x36.00x x914x AW4836P 44.87x x x36.00x x914x AW6036P 56.87x x835 Type 4 Enclosures Notes: Dimensions are in inches. Millimeters shown are for reference only. Data subject to change without notice. 155

207 Type 4 Enclosures Type 4 Single-Door Enclosures Illustration Sheet B B (**B).44 (11) mounting hole (4PL) C X 3.50 (89) A-2.75 (70) padlock hasp A+1.25 (32) A B-2.75 (70) C L door clamp (see note on this page) C optional back panel 3.50 (89) X print pocket (supplied) C L Type 4 Enclosures B-4.75 (121) mounting feet A-4.75 (121) C L collar stud (omit center studs where "A" is less than 36) collar stud (omit center studs where "B" is less than 36) C L Section X-X Notes: Dimensions: **B = (-2.50) if 12 inches wide; (-6.00) if wider than 12 inches. Clamps are mounted along three sides of the enclosure door. Spacing between clamps along side opposite the hinge does not exceed 15 inches. Dimensions are in inches. Millimeters shown are for reference only. Data subject to change without notice. 156

208 T&B Catalog Number: E UPC Number: Description: 4" Pre-galvanized steel square box, 2-1/8" deep, 30.3 cuin. Welded construction with 1/2" & 3/4" eccentric knockouts and ground bump. For use with conduit. Status: Active Header US_Web_Brand General Material Finish SC Steel Volume (cu.in.) 30.3 Construction Type Ground Bump Knockouts-Each Side (Conduit) Knockouts-Each End (Conduit) Galvanized Welded Yes (2) - 1/2", (1) - 1/2" & 3/4" E (2) - 1/2", (1) - 1/2" & 3/4" E Knockouts-Bottom (Conduit) (3) - 1/2", (2) - 1/2" & 3/4" E Dimension Information Size (inches) 4 Depth (inches) 2 1/8 Packaging Package in Units 50 T&B Sold in UOM Each T&B Weight Per UOM 86.7 lbs. per 100 Application Support Product Overview Available on Website NEC Article Boxes and Fittings Available on Website Product Brochure-Pre-Assemblies & Pre- Available on Website Fab Components Pre-Assemblies Labor Saving Calculator Available on Website Certifications RoHS Compliance No Certifications File Nbr: E 2969 For further technical assistance, please contact us... Thomas & Betts - USA 8155 T&B Blvd. Memphis, TN T&B Technical Support MS 3B T&B Blvd. Memphis, TN Hours: 7AM - 6PM CDT Monday-Friday Phone: (888) Fax: (901) techsupport@tnb.com

209 16-4 Quadruplex 600V Quadruplex 600V Secondary UD Aluminum Conductors. Cross-linked Polyethylene (XLP) Insulation. APPLICATIONS Used for secondary distribution and underground service at 600 volts or less, either direct burial or in ducts. SPECIFICATIONS Southwire's quadruplex or paralleled 600 volt secondary UD cable meets or exceeds the following applicable ASTM specifications: B-230 Aluminum 1350-H19 Wire for Electrical Purposes. B-231 Aluminum 1350 Conductors, Concentric-Lay-Stranded. B-609 Aluminum 1350 Round Wire, Annealed and Intermediate Tempers, for Electrical Purposes. B-901 Compressed Round Stranded Aluminum Conductors Using Single Input Wire. Southwire's quadruplex 600 volt secondary UD cable meets or exceeds all applicable requirements of ICEA S for cross-linked polyethylene insulated conductors and UL Standard 854 for Type USE-2. CONSTRUCTION Conductors are stranded, compressed 1350-H19, H16, or H26 aluminum, insulated with vulcanized interlinked polyethylene (VIP 1 ), Southwire's cross-linked polyethylene. Neutrals are triple yellow extruded stripe. Cables with "YES" neutrals have sequential footage markers. Conductors are durably surface printed for identification. Three phase conductors and one neutral conductor are cabled together to produce the quadruplex cable configuration. 1 VIP is a registered trademark of Southwire Company for cross-linked polyethylene (XLP). Wed Feb 17 11:28:35 EST 2010 Page 1 of 2

210 Quadruplex 600V Code Word Size (AWG) Phase Conductor Neutral Diameter (mils) Insul. Thick. (mils) Size (AWG) Stranding Stranding Insul. Thick. (mils) Single Phase Cond. Complete Cable Weight Per 1000 feet (lbs.) Allowable Ampacities+ Direct Burial In Ducts QUADRUPLEX WITH YELLOW EXTRUDED STRIPE NEUTRAL. Tulsa Dyke Wittenberg Notre Dame 1/ Purdue 1/ / Syracuse 2/ Lafayette 2/ / Swarthmore 3/ / Davidson 3/ / Wake Forest 4/ / Earlham 4/ / Slipperyrock / Ampacity: 90 C conductor temperature,20 C ambient, RHO 90, 100% load factor for three conductor triplex with neutral carrying only unbalanced load. Technical data for cable with solid black neutral is identical to yellow extruded stripe data except for "YES" suffix to code word. Also available in paralleled construction. For NEC Applications, use NEC Table Ampacities. Wed Feb 17 11:28:35 EST 2010 Page 2 of 2

211 Bare Copper Wire and Cable Bare Copper Conductor. Solid and Stranded. APPLICATIONS Solid and stranded (classes AA and A) bare copper are suitable for overhead transmission and distribution applications. Stranded conductor of greater flexibility (classes B and C) are suitable for uninsulated hook up, jumpers, and grounds in electrical construction. Soft Drawn copper is unilay construction. SPECIFICATIONS Southwire's bare copper wire and cable meets or exceeds the following ASTM specifications: B-1 Hard-Drawn Copper Wire. B-2 Medium-Hard Copper Wire. B-3 Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. B Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Soft copper wire. B-8 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Hard, Medium-Hard or Soft Copper Conductor. CONSTRUCTION Bare copper, solid or stranded. Available in tempers hard, medium-hard, or soft. Stranded conductors are concentrically stranded in hard and medium-hard tempers and are Combination Unilay stranded in the soft-drawn temper. Fri May 29 10:31:02 EDT 2009 Page 1 of 3

212 Bare Copper Size (AWG) Weight Per 1000 ft. (Ibs.) Diameter (mils) Circular Mil Area (cmils) Rated Strength (Ibs.) Hard-Drawn Medium-Hard Drawn Soft-Drawn (Annealed) Allowable Ampacity+ DC Resistance DC Resistance DC Resistance Ohms/ C Ohms/ C Ohms/ C Rated Strength (Ibs.) Rated Strength (Ibs.) SOLID Ampacity based on 75 C conductor temperature; 25 C ambient temperature; 2 ft./sec. wind in sun. Fri May 29 10:31:02 EDT 2009 Page 2 of 3

213 Bare Copper Size StrandingStranding (AWG Class or kcmil) Weight Per 1000 ft. (Ibs.) Diameter (mils) Hard-Drawn Medium-Hard Drawn Soft-Drawn (Annealed) Allowable Ampacity+ Individual Complete Rated Rated Rated Wires Cable Strength Strength Strength DC Resistance Ohms/ C STRANDED DC Resistance Ohms/ C DC Resistance Ohms/ C 8 7 B B A, B A, B A, B A /0 7 A, AA /0 19 B /0 7 A, AA /0 19 B /0 7 A, AA /0 7 A, AA /0 19 B A B A A A, B A, AA A, B A, B Ampacity based on 75 C conductor temperature; 25 C ambient temperature; 2 ft./sec. wind in sun. Fri May 29 10:31:02 EDT 2009 Page 3 of 3

214 Installation and Application Guide for 600V Conductors

215

216 Installation and Application Guide for 600V Conductors Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

217 Foreward This guide discusses recommended or best practices for installing 600 volt conductors in conduit. The purpose of the guide is to identify those critical areas of design, pre-planning and cable pulling that result in a successful installation. Within these areas are numerous commonly overlooked practices that can result in a failed installation. This guide is not intended to cover all aspects of cable installation, it is intended to provide guidelines and information on the more commonly misapplied techniques and equipment. There are four primary topics covered in this guide: Installation design and layout Evaluating a layout Proper setup Cable handling techniques and more Every effort was made to keep these guidelines brief yet descriptive. A note from the editor Best practices are always a challenging topic. The issue is to achieve balance between reasonable and little known practices. As these best practices were developed we struggled with what is reasonable and what is considered unreasonable. From years of experience in supporting wire and cable installations, we have concluded that the majority of wire installations in conduit can be classified as routine. This results in the unfortunate and inaccurate conclusion that all installations are routine. Southwire has found when best practices are not followed, the success of your installation is left to chance. When followed, these best practices virtually guarantee a successful installation. These best practices are not new or novel; they have been well documented and used in industrial installations. Southwire Company s Power Cable Manual and Southwire Company s Power Cable Installation Guide provide clear instructions for proper installations in industrial environments. This guide now provides valuable installation information to contractors and engineers for use in residential, commercial and institutional installations. Note: If you find you require more detailed information regarding your application contact your local Southwire sales representative or call Southwire directly at NoLube 0 ( ) for assistance. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

218 Best Practices 1. Pull Evaluation a. Know the expected pull tensions and sidewall pressures prior to the pull. Make sure minimum bend radii will not be exceeded. b. Never assume that an installation is routine. 2. Proofing Conduit a. Conduit must be free of all debris and damage. b. Never assume the conduit is clean. 3. Clean entry and exit from conduit system a. Rollers and sheaves are necessary for difficult pulls to eliminate damage when entering and exiting the conduit system. b. Never assume that the crew can guide the conductors in and out of the conduit. 4. Conductor Lubrication a. Applying lubricant is difficult, messy, and can be expensive on difficult pulls, often resulting in inadequate conductor lubrication. b. Southwire Company s SIM Technology products provide uniform pre-lubrication assuring the same or lower pulling tensions than when adding lubricants during installation. c. Never assume lubrication will be done correctly. Specify Southwire SIMpull products or specific lubrication system. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

219 Table of Contents Section 1. Cable and Conduit Selection Installation Assessment Checklist... 7 Conductor Type... 7 Copper Conductors... 7 Aluminum Conductors... 8 Conductor Size... 8 Ampacity... 8 Voltage Drop... 8 Maximum Reel Sizes and Conductor Length... 8 Conduit Sizing and Fill Ratio... 9 Conduit Layout... 9 Conductor Support in Vertical Raceways... 9 Pulling Evaluation Maximum Allowable Tension on Pulling Devices Maximum Allowable Tension of Conductors Single Conductors Multiple Conductors (three or less conductors) Multiple Conductors (more than three conductors) Calculating Pulling Tensions Incoming Tension Coefficients of Friction Conductor Configuration Conductor Jamming Weight Correction Factor Horizontal Straight Section Inclined and Vertical Straight Section Approximation for Bends Elbows and Bends (Approximation) Sidewall Pressure Bend Radius Section 2. Setup and Installation Installation Checklist Conduit Proofing Proofing Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

220 Installing rollers and sheaves Placement Pulley Sizes and Count Sheave Wheel Sizes and Types Preparing Conductors For Installation Package Inspection Reel Setup Pull Rope Low Tension Devices High Tension Devices Cable Lubrication Pulling Conductors Proper Conductor Handling Cold Weather Concerns Handling and Storage of Reels Vertical Installations Terminating Conductors Aluminum Connectors Section 3. Design and Application Guidelines Specifying Conduit Proofing Wire Brush Mandrel Rubber Duct Swab Test Mandrels Ampacity Considerations Grounding Considerations Section 4. Annexes Annex A. Type THHN Conductor Specification Annex B. Type XHHW Conductor Specification Annex C. Product Data Sheets Annex D. Field Testing Annex E. Reference Materials Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

221 page 7 Section 1. Cable and Conduit Selection Installation Assessment Checklist The following is a recommended checklist for selecting the appropriate conductor and conduit based on the application and environment. This checklist also provides steps to evaluate your selection. 1) Conductor Type: Select a conductor type based on your application and the conductor ratings and listings. 2) Conduit Size: Determine the conductor size required based on your application and conductor ampacity. 3) Reel Size: Determine the maximum reasonable cable length that permits proper on site handling, accounting for weight and dimensions. 4) Conduit Size: Select conduit size based on required fill, clearance, jamming, and applicable codes and standards. 5) Conduit Layout: Determine an initial conduit layout based on NEC compliance and reasonable expectations of pull length. 6) Maximum Tension: Calculate maximum allowable tension based on either cable stress or pulling device limitations. 7) Jamming Probability: Calculate weight correction factor (ω) and jamming ratio. a. does the jamming ratio indicate a likelihood of conductor jamming? If so, increase the conduit size to alleviate this issue. 8) Pulling Tension and Sidewall Pressure: Calculate pulling tension (T) and sidewall pressure (SP) for each segment. 9) Verify: Compare calculated results to established limits. 10) Redesign Pull: If limits are exceeded, consider one or more of the following: a. Increase bend radii b. Decrease fill c. Reduce number of bends d. Reverse pull e. Pull in stages f. Decrease length of pull Conductor Type Choosing the appropriate conductor for the application will help provide a trouble-free installation for years to come. For outdoor and underground conduit applications the cable should be listed for wet locations. In underground conduit applications, where the cable is subject to immersion in water for extended periods of time, conventional wisdom is thicker insulations are better. Further, conductors free from cuts and abrasions due to installation damage are less likely to fail prematurely in wet applications. Copper Conductors Traditionally copper conductors are a popular choice in conduit feeder applications. Copper has a very high conductivity and therefore a smaller conductor size compared to aluminum for a given application. Copper also has a higher tensile strength when compared to aluminum conductors. The disadvantages of copper include weight and cost. National Electrical Code and NEC are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc., Quincy, MA Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

222 page 8 Aluminum Conductors Aluminum has certain advantages over copper conductors. Aluminum conductors are 2.5 to 3 times lighter than the ampacity equivalent copper conductor. This means lower installation tensions and less likelihood of damaged cable during installation. Aluminum conductors are typically compact stranded which reduces the overall conductor diameter by 10% over concentric stranding. Meaning, although a larger conductor is needed for ampacity equivalency, the conduit fill penalty for that larger conductor is minimal. Aluminum is a reliable and cost effective conductor material. Trouble free installations are achieved when using listed aluminum conductors with listed connectors. Conductor Size Conductor sizing is usually determined by allowable ampacity. In the case of longer circuit lengths, conductor sizing may be determined by limiting voltage drop to an acceptable level. Ampacity When determining the allowable ampacity of a conductor it is important to account for any derating factors such as more than three current carrying conductors in a conduit or high ambient temperature. Ignoring the factors that require ampacity derating can result in overheating and premature failure of conductors. Further details on calculating allowable ampacities is given in Section 3 of this installation guide. Voltage Drop On longer circuit lengths, voltage drop may determine conductor size. Once a conductor has been sized based on allowable ampacity, including all derating factors a voltage drop calculation can determine if that conductor size is suitable. Generally a voltage drop of 3% or less will provide a system that operates properly and efficiently. Maximum Reel Sizes and Conductor Length The conduit layout may be directly affected by the maximum available length or field handling limitations for the chosen conductor. The maximum reel size should be limited such that it can be properly handled in the field according to the practices in Section 2 of this Installation Guide. If necessary, additional splice locations should be included in the conduit layout to limit the maximum cable length required. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

223 page 9 Conduit Sizing and Fill Ratio Conduit fill is the percentage of the area inside the conduit taken up by the conductor(s). Consult applicable codes, industry standards, and manufacturer s data for further information on fill. Dimensions for the various types of conduits can be found in Chapter 9 of the National Electrical Code. NEC conduit fill tables for various conduit types can be found in the annex of this guide. % Fill = d D 2 N 100 Where: d = outside diameter of the conductor in inches D = inside diameter of the conduit in inches N = number of conductors Table 1 - Permitted Fill Ratio Number of Conductors 1 2 Over 2 Percent Fill 53% 31% 40% Based on NEC Chapter 9 Table 1 Conduit Layout The initial conduit layout should comply with all NEC requirements in that conduit type s respective article. All NEC conduit articles limit the conduit layout to 360 degrees of bend between pull boxes. After performing a pull evaluation as described in this section it may be determined necessary to include additional pull boxes to limit pulling tension or sidewall pressures. Conductor Support in Vertical Raceways In vertical raceway applications, NEC Article requires that the conductors are supported and secured at intervals. The conductors should be supported at the specified intervals by one of the methods detailed in the NEC. These intervals are determined by the size and weight of the conductor. Table (A) provides the required support and securing intervals by conductor type and size. Table 2 - Support in Vertical Raceways Wire Size Aluminum Copper 18 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG 1/0 AWG 2/0 AWG 4/0 AWG > 4/0 AWG 350 kcmil > 350 kcmil 500 kcmil > 500 kcmil 750 kcmil > 750 kcmil Based on NEC Table (A) 100 ft 200 ft 180 ft 135 ft 120 ft 95 ft 85 ft 100 ft 100 ft 80 ft 60 ft 50 ft 40 ft 35 ft Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

224 page 10 Pulling Evaluation The small details can make the difference between successful installations and having to remove damaged conductors. In preparing for a conductor pull, it is just as important to cover the small details as it is to assure that the conductor does not exceed maximum sidewall pressure, minimum bending radii or maximum pulling tensions. General field practices are provided to aid in preparing for large and small conductor installations. Conductors installed in conduits have installation parameters, such as maximum pulling tensions, sidewall pressure, clearance, and jamming, which must be considered. These installations also involve some general considerations, such as field handling, storage, training of ends, and junction box sizes. These and other considerations can make the difference between a good installation and one resulting in damaged conductors. Mechanical stresses during installation are generally more severe than those encountered while in service. The following information provides guidance in recognizing these conditions and provides a methodology to aid in keeping them within acceptable limits. Calculations should be made to indicate whether the pull looks easy or impossible, making the decision to pull an obvious choice. When a marginal situation is encountered, the entire pull should be reviewed. This review may include more rigorous calculations or trial pulls. A final decision should be made based on installation factors known to the end user and installer. The sizes of the conduit are determined based on the calculations of the clearances, jamming, and fill. Pulling tensions may then be evaluated by determining the maximum tension based on the pulling device used and the maximum tension that can be applied to the conductors. The lesser of these two values is the maximum allowable tension (T m ). The pulling tension (T) required to pull the conductor through the conduit is then calculated and compared to the maximum allowable tension. If the pulling tension exceeds the allowable tension, then conditions should be changed to ensure a successful pull. After calculating pulling tensions, sidewall pressures (SP) may be calculated. For further study on this subject, AEIC Publication G5-90 and IEEE Standard 1185 present additional details. Maximum Allowable Tension on Pulling Devices The allowable tension stated by the manufacturer of a pulling device should not be exceeded. General guidelines for pulling device allowable pulling tensions are provided below. Pulling Eye 10,000 pounds or the manufacturer s published rating, whichever is less. Basket Grip Traditional practices limit the allowable tension of a basket grip to 1,000 pounds. Under specific conditions this limit can be safely exceeded. Other Means Field-fabricated devices such as mare s tails have been commonly used. Extreme care should be taken while using these means as the maximum allowable pulling tension of such devices is generally unknown. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

225 page 11 Maximum Allowable Tension of Conductors The metallic core of the conductor is generally the only member that can bear the pulling forces without damage. Do not use metallic shielding wires, tapes, braids or armor not designed for the purpose in pulling tension calculations. Variable definitions for the following equations and examples: T c = tension on each conductor, in pounds S = allowable stress from Table 3, in pounds/cmil A = area of each conductor, in cmil N = number of conductors T device = maximum allowable tension on device in pounds T total = maximum allowable tension of multiple conductors pulled together in pounds Table 3 Conductor Stress Maximum Allowable Conductor Stress Metal Copper Aluminum 1350 Alloy Aluminum 8000 Series Alloy lb/cmil Table 4 - Conductor Area Size (AWG) /0 2/0 3/0 4/0 cmil Size (kcmil) cmil 4,110 6,530 10,380 16,510 20,820 26,240 33,090 41,740 52,620 66,360 83, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,000 1,000,000 1,200,000 Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

226 page 12 Single Conductors: T c = S A pounds Example: Single Type THHN conductor, 4/0 AWG copper T c = (0.008) (211,600) pounds T c = 1,693 pounds Multiple Conductors (three or less conductors): T total = N T c pounds Example: Two Type THHN conductors, 4/0 AWG copper T total = (2) (1,693) pounds T total = 3,386 pounds Multiple Conductors (more than three conductors): T total = (0.8) N T c pounds Example: Four Type THHN conductors, 6 AWG copper T c = (0.008) (26,240) pounds T c = 210 pounds T total = (0.8) (4) (210) pounds T total = 672 pounds CAUTION: Pulling different conductor sizes at the same time is not recommended if the conductor size or other characteristics are significantly different. If you must pull different size conductors, it must be done with care. For example, if a run requires three 350 kcmil and three 8 AWG single conductors, it would be preferable, though not necessarily ideal, to pull the three 350 kcmil single conductors and one 3 conductor 8 AWG cable at the same time. Pulling additional conductors into an existing conduit system is generally not recommended. If this must be done, extreme caution must be taken. Of special concern is the cutting action of the tensioned pulling rope. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

227 page 13 Calculating Pulling Tensions The following equations allow the user to calculate the expected pulling tension of a conductor in a conduit pull. These calculations only provide an estimate to assist the user in determining the feasibility of the installation in question. Many factors affect the actual tensions and sidewall pressures one might see in an average pull. The coefficient of friction between a conductor exterior (jacket/sheath) and conduit varies with the type of jacket or sheath, type and condition of conduit, type and amount of pulling lubricant used, conductor temperature, and ambient temperature. High ambient temperatures (80 F and above) can increase the coefficient of dynamic friction for conductors having a nonmetallic jacket. Pulling lubricants must be compatible with conductor components and be applied while the conductor is being pulled. Pre-lubrication of the conduit is recommended by some lubricant manufacturers. Southwire s SIMpull THHN requires no pulling lubricant. Incoming Tension Incoming tension will greatly affect the overall tension in a conductor pull. This tension is multiplied throughout the conductor pull and therefore has a great affect on the overall pulling tension. It is important to estimate the incoming tension as accurately as possible when calculating the expected pulling tension. Feeding Off Reel Horizontally When the conductor(s) are fed off the reel horizontally for some distance, the following equation should be used to approximate the tension required to remove the conductor from the reel: T in = 25 W pounds where: W = total cable assembly weight, in pounds/foot Feeding Off Reel Vertically When the conductor reel must be positioned directly below the conduit, the following equation should be used to approximate the tension required to pull the conductor into the conduit: T in = W L pounds where: W = total cable assembly weight, in pounds/foot L = straight vertical section length, in feet The tension can now be approximated for pulling the conductor into a conduit from a horizontal position when the reel is placed directly under the conduit. To estimate the tension entering the conduit when the reel must be placed away from and below the entrance to the tray, use the equation for feeding off the reel vertically where the height (L) is the vertical distance between the reel and conduit. To allow for bending forces as the conductor comes off the reel, the minimum tension added should be 25 W. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

228 page 14 Coefficients of Friction The coefficient of dynamic friction (μ) is a measure of the friction between a moving conductor and the conduit. The coefficient of friction can have a large impact on the tension calculation. It can vary from 0.1 to 1.0 with lubrication and can exceed 1.0 for unlubricated pulls. Typical values for the coefficient of friction are presented in Table 5. Pulls should never be stopped and restarted because the coefficient of static friction will always be higher than the coefficient of dynamic friction. Table 5 Typical Coefficients of Dynamic Friction (μ) for Cables with an Adequate Cable Lubrication* During a Pull Cable Outer Jacket or Insulation TYPE THHN/THWN (Nylon) SIMpull THHN ** Type XHHW, Type USE, Type RHH/RHW (XLPE) Conduit Type EMT PVC 0.28* 0.28 Lubrication not required with Southwire SIMpull THHN products * Values based on Polywater Pull Planner 2000 ** SIMpull THHN can approach a coefficient of friction of However, for the purpose of evaluation, the more conservative values stated above are appropriate. The coefficient of friction between a conductor exterior (jacket/sheath) and conduit varies with the type of jacket or sheath, type and condition of conduit, type and amount of pulling lubricant used, conductor temperature, and ambient temperature. High ambient temperatures (80 F and above) can increase the coefficient of dynamic friction for conductors having a nonmetallic jacket. Pulling lubricants must be compatible with conductor components and be applied while the conductor is being pulled. Prelubrication of the conduit is recommended by lubricant manufacturers to achieve the best results. Conductor Configuration The configuration of three single-conductors in a conduit is determined by the ratio of the conduit inner diameter (D) to the outer diameter (d) of one of the single conductors (D/d ratio). 0.25* 0.24* * Figure 1 Configuration of Three Single Conductors A cradled configuration develops when three single-conductors are pulled into a conduit where the D/d ratio is 2.5 or greater. A triangular configuration develops when three single-conductors are pulled into a conduit where the D/d ratio is less than 2.5. These conductors may be pulled from individual reels, tandem reels, or a single reel with parallel wound conductors. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

229 page 15 Conductor Jamming Jamming is the wedging of three or more conductors when pulled into a conduit. This usually occurs because of crossovers when the conductors twist or are pulled around bends. The jam ratio is the ratio of the conduit inner diameter (D) and the conductor outside diameter (d). Jam Ratio = D d The probability for jamming is presented in Figure 2 Figure 2 Jamming Probabilities Using the Jam Ratio Weight Correction Factor The configuration of conductors can affect conductor tension. A weight correction factor (ω) is used in the tension equations to account for this effect. The value for the weight correction factor is determined from the equations that follow: Single Conductor: ω = 1 Three Conductors (Triangular): 1 ω = d 1- (D-d) 2 Three Conductors (Cradled): ω = (D-d) d 2 Four Conductors or More (Complex): ω = 1.4 Note: When pulling two conductors it is suggested that the conservative three-conductor (triangular) factor be used for calculations. Variable definitions for the following equations and examples: T in = tension into a section in pounds T out = tension out of a section in pounds ω = weight correction factor, dimensionless μ = coefficient of dynamic friction, dimensionless W = total cable assembly weight on pounds/foot L = straight section length in feet θ = straight section angle from horizontal in radians ϕ = bend section angle in radians R = bend section radius in feet e = 2.71 natural logarithm base Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

230 page 16 Horizontal Straight Section: T out = ω μ W L + T in Inclined and Vertical Straight Section: Pulling Up: T out = WL(sinθ + ωcosθ) + T in pounds Pulling Down: T out = -WL(sinθ μcosθ) + T in pounds Approximation for Bends The equations for calculating pulling tensions through bends with the varying orientations and gravitational pulling directions are complicated. For this reason, it is common practice to use an approximation for all bends. Elbows and Bends (Approximation): T out = T in e ωμϕ Sidewall pressure Sidewall pressure is the vector force that exists on the cable as it is pulled through a bend. Because the surface area of the bend is smaller in small radius bends, that force is concentrated over a much smaller area. Most of the time sidewall pressure is the limiting factor in a cable pull. Sidewall pressure is calculated as follows: For one single-conductor cable or multiple-conductor cable under a common jacket SP = T R For three single-conductor cables, cradled SP = (3ω -2) T (3R) For three single-conductor cables, triangular SP = ω T (2R) where: T = tension coming out of the bend in pounds R = bend radius, in feet ω = weight correction factor, dimensionless SP = sidewall pressure in pounds/foot Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

231 page 17 Figure 3 Sidewall Pressure Factors Table 6 - Maximum Allowable Sidewall Pressure Cable Type 600V Nonshielded Control Cable (Type TC Cable) 600V & 1kV Nonshielded Power Cable (Types THHN, THWN, USE, RHH, and RHW) SP lbs/ft Bend Radius The minimum allowable bend radii of non-shielded conductors are typically expressed as a multiplier of the conductor outside diameter. The general guidelines for conductor training bend radii are given in Table 7. Table 7 Minimum Bend Radius Cable Diameter Inches Up to and Over Bend Radius as a Multiplier of the Cable OD In some cases specific guidelines exist for certain conductors such as USE. The NEC Article 338 requires the minimum bend radius for USE not exceed 5 times the conductor outside diameter. The minimum allowable bend radii above are for conductors being permanently trained into final position. While pulling, it is necessary to use larger radius rollers and conduit bends to help minimize sidewall pressures and limit excessive pulling tensions. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

232 page 18 Section 2. Setup and Installation Installation Checklist 1) Conduit Free of Debris: Was the conduit proofed using a mandrel to remove any debris and ensure the conduit is free from obstructions? 2) Rollers and Sheaves Properly Installed: Are the rollers and sheaves the appropriate size to meet the minimum bending radius of the conductor and limit excessive sidewall pressures? 3) Tugger Properly Setup: Must the conductor be pulled across a roller on the tugger? If so, is the roller on the tugger of sufficient size for the conductor s minimum bend radius and sidewall pressure? 4) Reels Damage Free: Have the conductor reels been inspected for damage during shipping? 5) Conductors Freely Payoff Reel: Are the conductor reels setup in an area that permits the conductor to payoff freely? 6) Pull Rope Properly Attached: Is the appropriate pulling device, based on the expected pulling tensions, installed properly on the conductor ends? 7) Conductor Lubrication: If not using Southwire s SIMpull THHN, has the conductor been sufficiently lubricated? 8) Proper Terminations: Are the equipment terminations properly sized and rated for the conductor? Conduit Proofing Obstructions in the conduit will increase installation tensions and difficulties, and in worst cases make the pull impossible to accomplish. Further, debris in conduit is often a contributing factor in damaged conductors. Proofing The process of proofing the conduit can be accomplished as the pulling rope is being pulled into the conduit. A rubber duct swab to proof the duct is recommended. If a wire brush mandrel is needed to dislodge an obstruction, attach the wire brush mandrel to the pull line. Behind the wire brush mandrel trail the rubber duct swab by approximately 4 to 6 feet with a sturdy rope section. Attach the pull rope to the trailing end of the rubber duct swab. While pulling in the pull rope the wire brush mandrel (if needed) will loosen stuck debris and the rubber duct swab will extract that debris. Now you can execute the conductor pull confident the conduit is clear of potentially damaging debris. Installing rollers and sheaves Using the correct rollers and sheaves and placing them correctly can be the difference in a good installation and damaged conductors. Proper placement of sheave wheels, pulleys and rollers help protect the conductors and will reduce the installation time. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

233 page 19 Placement First, determine the number and location of rollers, sheave wheels or radius roller assemblies that are required based on the conductor minimum bend radius and support needed. Be sure that sheaves and rollers are mounted securely to withstand the required pulling forces. Sheave wheels, pulleys and rollers must be maintained and lubricated to reduce friction. Many times the conductor(s) are pulled across a pulley or sheave as it exits the conduit run. It is easy to ignore this pulley during the evaluation of the pull. However, this can be the most critical pulley as cable tensions usually increase toward the end of the cable pull. Be sure this pulley is large enough not to exceed the cable bend radius or the allowable sidewall pressure. Pulley sizes and count Wherever pulleys and sheaves are required, it is important to account for bend radius and sidewall pressures. The pulley and sheaves should at least be larger than the minimum bending radius of the cable, and large enough to minimize the sidewall pressures at that point in the pull. On occasion it may be necessary to have multiple pulleys in large pull boxes, manholes and vaults. The pulleys should be of sufficient number and arranged such that the cable is supported and transitions easily into or out of the conduit. Arranging the pulleys or sheaves in such a manner will decrease overall pulling tensions and result in quicker and easier pulls. Sheave wheel sizes and types When pulling conductors around sheaves, large sheave diameters will reduce the amount of sidewall pressure created at each bend. If you have a large bending radius you may not be able to find a radius roller large enough to meet the required bending radius required for this installation. Large conductors may require the use of radius rollers, in which multiple wheels mounted together provide the required bend radius. The individual sheaves in such a roller assembly should have a minimum inside radius of 1.25 in. Sheave or radius rollers should be located every 20 degrees of bend. NOTE: Never use a three-sheave assembly on a 90-degree bend to pull conductors. Table 8 Multi-Roller Sheave Assemblies Bending Angle (degrees) Number of Sheaves Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

234 page 20 Preparing Conductors for Installation Package Inspection Preplanning is an important part of every pull. The conductor package should be checked for the following prior to beginning the pull. 1) Check the conductor(s) for: a. Correct size and type b. Shipping damage c. Special instructions 2) Check the reel(s) for: a. Damage b. Protruding nails or staples that might damage conductor Reel Setup The cable reels should be setup to payoff in line if possible to facilitate and uniform conductor bundle entering the conduit. The reels should be supported by properly maintained quality reel stands to ensure even payoff. Incoming tensions will be magnified throughout the pull, and for this reason it is important to limit the cable tension as it enters the conduit. The cable should feed straight into the conduit by hand or, for larger conductors, over a large diameter sheave. The reel payoff should be assisted by hand or cable feeder to limit incoming tensions in the cable pull. When using SIMpull products with a cable feeder, the feeder may need to be adjusted to eliminate cable slip. Pull Rope The pulling rope used shall be of adequate strength to pull the maximum allowable conductor pulling tensions. If PVC elbows are used, care should be taken not to damage the elbows with the pulling line. The use of flat strap, MuleTape or Double-braided composite pulling line is recommended to avoid the pulling line burning through the elbows on difficult pulls. Polypropylene pulling ropes tend to have higher stretch and more prone to conduit burn-thru on difficult pulls. The pulling rope should be attached by a means that is suitable for the expected pulling tensions. Low Tension Devices Wire mesh pulling grips are typically limited to 1,000 pound pulling tension. Under no circumstance should the manufacturer published tensile rating for the device be exceeded. Other field fabricated pulling means are commonly used when pulling cable. These means should not be used in high tension pulls, and extreme care should be taken when using such means to pull cable as they have unproven tensile capabilities. High Tension Devices Pulling eyes should be used when the expected pulling tensions are greater than pounds. Again, under no circumstance should the manufacturer published tensile rating for the device be exceeded. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

235 page 21 Cable Lubrication Reducing the coefficient of friction is the primary factor in the selection of a lubricant. Compatibility of the lubricant with cable and conduit is extremely important. The lubricant should not have any deleterious effects on the conduit or on the physical or electrical properties of the cable insulation, or jacket materials. An estimate of the quantity of required lubricant can be determined: Q = L D where: Q = Quantity in gallons L = The conduit length in feet d = The inside diameter of the conduit in inches Southwire Company s SIMpull products provide uniform pre-lubrication eliminating the need for messy lubricants while assuring the same or lower pulling tensions as when adding lubricants during the installation. Pulling Conductors With the proper setup based on a thorough evaluation and clean conduit, it is expected the pull will be successful. If at all possible, the pull should be accomplished in a single slow pull. Starting and stopping a pull is not ideal since it can take considerably more force to start the pull again. There are times that adjustments will need to be made during the pull. For this reason, it is important to have good means of communications among the various members of the pulling team. This allows the pull to be suspended in the event a problem arises or an adjustment must be made to pulleys, payoffs, etc. Proper Conductor Handling It is important to always take care when handling cable reels and conductors. Mishandling of cable reels and conductors can damage the conductor resulting in an electrical installation that does not operate properly or fails prematurely. Although the following points do not reflect every possible mishandling situation, they do represent some of the more commonly overlooked situations. Cold Weather Concerns Low temperatures can be a concern when installing conductors. Conductors should be handled more carefully and pulled more slowly during cold weather. If conductors must be installed during cold weather, approaching freezing, it is important to make sure the core temperature of the reel is sufficiently warm to prevent damaging the insulation system. The conductor should be kept in heated storage for at least 24 hours prior to installation to enable the conductor to warm up throughout the reel. Conductors should not be installed at ambient temperatures lower than: Table 9 Minimum Conductor Installation Temperatures Insulation or Jacket Type THHN/THWN, THW (PVC) Type MV-105 (EPR) Types XHHW, USE, RHH, and RHW (XLPE) Minimum Installation Temperature -10 o C -40 o C -40 o C 14 o F -40 o F -40 o F Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

236 page 22 Handling and Storage of Reels It is important to properly store and handle conductors on the reel. Below is a list of general guidelines to follow when moving and storing reels. 1) unloading equipment should not come in contact with the conductor or its protective covering. 2) If a crane is used to unload cable, a shaft through the arbor hole or a cradle supporting both reel flanges should be used. Proper Reel Handling Techniques 3) Forklifts must lift the reel by contacting both flanges. Proper Reel Handling Techniques Improper Reel Handling Techniques 4) Ramps must be wide enough to support both reel flanges. Proper Reel Handling Techniques Improper Reel Handling Techniques 5) Store reels on hard surface so that the flanges will not sink and allow reel weight to rest on cable. Proper Reel Handling Techniques Improper Reel Handling Techniques Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

237 page 23 6) Reels should be stored out of harm s way. Consider both physical and environmental hazards. 7) Conductor ends must always be sealed to prevent the entrance of moisture, etc. 8) Remove temporary lashing. 9) While pulling, in order to eliminate sharp bends and crossovers, always have a person feed the cable(s) straight into the conduit by hand or, for larger conductors, over a large diameter sheave. Proper Improper 10) do not pull conductors directly across short, sharp angles. After pulling completely out of one side of the enclosure, feed conductors into the other side of the enclosure and pull that segment. Proper Improper Caution: Minimum bending radii must be maintained. Vertical Installations Proper precautions must be taken to keep conductors from free falling during vertical installations. Never assume that adequate tension exists between the conductors and conduit to keep the conductors from falling. In vertical installations, conductors are typically placed at the top of the installation so they can be pulled from the top down, greatly reducing or eliminating pulling tension on the conductors. The following steps should always be taken to make sure the conductors are secure at all times. The solution would come in two parts: Support During Installation Securing the reel during installation and supplemental braking is recommended on vertical installations. Installers should not rely solely on a reel brake during vertical installations. Reel braking can fail for various reasons. Therefore, the conductors should also have some type of alternate braking mechanism. If the reel brake mechanism fails, the alternate system can stop the conductors, keeping them from free-falling to the ground. Continue to test your braking mechanisms as you progress through the pull. Support Immediately After Installation Once the cable has been pulled, the conductors should be secured in several locations as soon as possible. Conductors should never be secured by only the braking mechanisms at the top of the pull. When securing with a clamp, basket grip or wedge grip, it s important that properly applied electrical tape or friction tape be used under the device to hold the conductors in place. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

238 page 24 Permanent Support After the conductors are installed, they must be supported per NEC Supporting Conductors in Vertical Raceways. The installation must meet the maximum spacing intervals and support methods in NEC Properly applied electrical or friction tape under the device is important to ensure long-term support. Terminating Conductors Proper termination of the conductors is directly related to system reliability. It is imperative that properly rated devices are used. This became apparent in the 1960s when aluminum wiring was terminated to devices rated for copper conductors. The result was unreliable electrical systems. AA-8000 series aluminum paired with UL listed terminations has resulted in proven reliable residential and commercial installations for over 30 years. What follows is some history and best practices for aluminum conductor termination. Aluminum Connectors With the advent of AA-8000 series aluminum alloy, listed aluminum terminations are as reliable as copper. When aluminum was first used for commercial and residential wiring in the 1960s, manufacturers used the same EC 1350 electrical grade aluminum used by utilities. The same properties that make this alloy great for transmission applications made it a poor choice for the commercial terminations of the times. The solution would come in two parts: 1) A new aluminum alloy that possessed the properties to perform well in commercial and residential terminations was needed. Southwire was the first to introduce such an alloy in 1968 and called it triple e (now called AlumFlex, emphasizing its ease of installation). Later the National Electrical Code required the use of 8000 series aluminum alloy and Underwriters Laboratory (UL) required that all aluminum building wire, with the exception of single-rated USE, be manufactured with AA-8000 series aluminum. 2) Listed connectors were another important factor in reliable aluminum conductor terminations. In the 1960s, terminal lugs were not tested or designed for use with aluminum wire. Today s listed connectors are designed and tested for use with AA-8000 series aluminum alloy. This ensures complete compatibility of materials, such as brass set screws instead of steel. When terminating aluminum conductors, there are several practices one should be aware of to ensure a quality connection that will remain trouble free. 1) Always use a connector that is listed for use with aluminum wire. 2) The following is recommended but not required. Always follow the connector manufacturer s instructions a. The surface of the conductor should be wire-brushed to break any aluminum oxide barrier leaving a clean surface for the connection. b. The use of anti-oxidant compound, joint compound, is not required unless the connector s manufacturer requires it. However, the use of a listed joint compound is always a good practice. 3) Always tighten set-screw type connectors to the manufacturer s recommended torque. 4) Most importantly, do not re-torque the terminations as part of routine maintenance. As with copper conductors, repeated tightening of any set-screw connections can result in the eventual biting through the conductor causing the termination to fail. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

239 page 25 Section 3. Design and Application Guidelines Specifying Conduit Proofing Cable is commonly damaged due to debris left in the conduit during installation. Prior to pulling the conductors, it is considered good practice to proof the conduit system. The purpose of proofing the conduit system is to ensure the conduit is intact, not crushed or disjointed, and the conduit is clear from debris that could damage the conductor jacket or insulation. This is accomplished with the use of wire brush mandrels, duct swabs and mandrels. Wire Brush Mandrel A wire brush mandrel consists of a length of brush approximately the size of the conduit inner diameter with stiff steel bristles and an eye on each end for attaching the pull ropes. This wire brush mandrel is pulled through the duct to break up any debris deposits that might exist in the conduit run. If an obstruction is felt the brush can be pulled back and forth repeatedly to break up the obstruction. Rubber Duct Swab A rubber duct swab typically consists of a series of rubber discs approximately the size of the conduit inner diameter on a length of steel cable with an eye on each end for attaching pull ropes. The rubber duct swab is pulled through the duct to extract loose debris from the duct that may damage conductor jackets or insulations. It is imperative that the appropriate size swab is used to ensure its effectiveness. The use of a swab will also locate damage ducts that would cause the conductors to bind and increase pulling tensions. Test Mandrels Test mandrels are solid slugs that represent a conduit fill of 80% or more. The mandrel is pulled through the conduit to locate obstructions that would prevent the conductors from being pulled in. A mandrel may not be necessary when a rubber duct swab is used as either would indicate an obstruction while a rubber duct swab is the correct choice for removing debris. By specifying the conduit to be proofed prior to installing the cable, designers and engineers increase the likelihood of an installation free of damaged cable, and as a result a more reliable installation. Unless there is reason to believe the conduit is damaged, the recommended conduit proofing practice is to use a rubber duct swab. A duct swab will remove any loose debris and will help identify any severe obstructions in the conduit. If an obstruction is located, it may be necessary to dislodge the obstruction with a wire brush mandrel and follow with a duct swab to remove the loosened debris. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

240 page 26 Ampacity Considerations Copper is assigned a conductivity of 100%. The conductivity of all other metals is compared to copper. The conductivity of aluminum is approximately 62% of that of copper. It is commonly accepted that comparable current-carrying copper and aluminum conductors are separated by two AWG sizes. For example, an 8 AWG copper and 6 AWG aluminum conductor can carry the same amount of current. Conductors larger than those listed in the American Wire Gage system are sized based on their circularmil area. The rule of two sizes larger for aluminum conductors versus copper may not work for the circular-mil sizes of conductors. The best solution is to consult the appropriate NEC ampacity table for the correct size aluminum conductor to replace a copper conductor. A copy of NEC Table is included in the annex of this manual on page 36. Grounding Considerations The equipment grounding conductor in conduit and conductor installations should be sized based on the over current protection device per Table of the NEC. For conductors in parallel runs, the equipment grounding conductor in each conduit should be sized to match on the upstream overcurrent protection device rating based on Table in the NEC. Table is included in the annex of this guide for convenience on page 34. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

241 page 27 Section 4. Annexes Annex A. Type THHN Conductor Specification WIRE AND CABLE TYPE THHN PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SPECIFICATION INCLUDES Cable Type: Type THHN/THWN for use as services, feeders and branch circuits General Applications: Type THHN/THWN cable may be used in the following general applications per the National Electrical Code In Conduit In Cable Tray For Services For Feeders For Branch Circuits Wet or Dry Locations 1.2 SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer s product data confirming that materials comply with specified requirements and are suitable for the intended application Installation Instructions: Manufacturer s installation instructions shall be included in submittal. Industry guides may supplement the manufacturer s instructions. 1.3 REQUIREMENTS underwriters Laboratories: Type THHN cable shall meet the following Underwriters Laboratories (UL) standards and listings UL 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables UL 1063 UL Standard for Safety Machine-Tool Wires and Cables UL listed sunlight resistant in black sizes 2 AWG and larger Sizes 1/0 AWG and larger listed for CT USE Sizes 14 through 1 AWG shall be rated VW Sizes 8 AWG and larger shall be rated THWN ASTM Standards: Type THHN cable shall meet all applicable ASTM standards Federal Specifications: Type THHN cable shall meet Federal Specification A-A PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER Southwire Company, One Southwire Drive, Carrollton, Georgia, Website: Senator Wire and Cable, 102 City Hall Ave., Carrollton, Georgia, Website: CABLE CONSTRUCTION Conductor: The conductor shall be soft annealed copper Insulation: The insulation shall be high-heat and moisture resistant PVC Jacket: The jacket shall be abrasion, moisture, gasoline and oil resistant nylon or listed equivalent with: Self-Lubricating Jacket: Jackets on conductor sizes 1/0 AWG and larger shall be SIMpull or equivalent having integrated self-lubrication such that the cable coefficient of friction is less than or equal to Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

242 page 28 PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.1 INSTALLATION Manufacturer s Instructions: Type THHN cable shall be installed per the manufacturer s published installation instructions. Industry guides may supplement the manufacturer s instructions Field Support: Manufacturer shall provide, when requested, field engineering support for Type THHN cable installation Manufacturer: Type THHN cable for circuits, feeders and services shall be supplied from a single manufacturer Minimum Bend Radius: Bends in Type THHN shall be made so that the cable will not be damaged. 3.2 SPECIFIC USES Type THHN cable may be used in conduit, raceways and cable trays for services, feeders and branch circuits as specified in the applicable section of the NEC. 3.3 USES NOT PERMITTED Type THHN cable shall not be used in direct burial applications. 3.4 AMPACITY The ampacity of Type THHN cable shall be determined in accordance with Article of the National Electrical Code. The installation should not exceed the temperature ratings of the terminations and equipment. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

243 page 29 Annex B. Type XHHW Conductor Specification WIRE AND CABLE TYPE XHHW-2 PART 1 GENERAL 1.4 SPECIFICATION INCLUDES Cable Type: Type XHHW for use as services, feeders and branch circuits General Applications: Type XHHW cable may be used in the following general applications per the National Electrical Code In Conduit In Cable Tray For Services For Feeders For Branch Circuits Wet or Dry Locations 1.5 SUBMITTALS Product Data: Submit manufacturer s product data confirming that materials comply with specified requirements and are suitable for the intended application Installation Instructions: Manufacturer s installation instructions shall be included in submittal. Industry guides may supplement the manufacturer s instructions. 1.6 REQUIREMENTS underwriters Laboratories: Type XHHW cable shall meet the following Underwriters Laboratories (UL) standards and listings UL 44 Thermoset Insulated Wires and Cables UL listed sunlight resistant in black sizes 2 AWG and larger Sizes 1/0 AWG and larger listed for CT USE Sizes 14 through 8 AWG shall be rated SIS All sizes shall be rated XHHW ICEA Standards: Type XHHW cable shall meet all construction requirements of ICEA S (NEMA WC 70) Nonshielded 0-2 kv Cables ASTM Standards: Type XHHW cable shall meet all applicable ASTM standards Federal Specifications: Type XHHW cable shall meet Federal Specification A-A PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.3 MANUFACTURER Southwire Company, One Southwire Drive, Carrollton, Georgia, Website: Senator Wire and Cable, 102 City Hall Ave., Carrollton, Georgia, Website: CABLE CONSTRUCTION Conductor: The conductor shall be soft annealed copper Insulation: Insulation shall be abrasion, moisture, and heat resistant cross-linked polyethylene Alternate Construction: Type XHHW-2 shall be listed CT USE by request. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

244 page 30 PART 3 INSTALLATION 3.5 INSTALLATION Manufacturer s Instructions: Type XHHW cable shall be installed per the manufacturer s published installation instructions. Industry guides may supplement the manufacturer s instructions Field Support: Manufacturer shall provide, when requested, field engineering support for Type XHHW cable installation Manufacturer: Type XHHW cable for circuits, feeders and services shall be supplied from a single manufacturer Minimum Bend Radius: Bends in Type XHHW shall be made so that the cable will not be damaged. 3.6 SPECIFIC USES Type XHHW cable may be used in conduit, raceways and cable trays for services, feeders and branch circuits as specified in the applicable section of the NEC. 3.7 uses NOT PERMITTED Type XHHW cable shall not be used in direct burial applications. 3.8 AMPACITY The ampacity of Type XHHW cable shall be determined in accordance with Article of the National Electrical Code. The installation should not exceed the temperature ratings of the terminations and equipment. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

245 page 31 Annex C. Product Data sheets SIMpull THHN 600 Volts. Copper Conductor. Thermoplastic Insulation/SIM Nylon Sheath Heat, Moisture, Gasoline, and Oil Resistant¹ Rated MTW and THWN-2* Sizes Through 500 kcmil Listed T90 Nylon or TWN 75 Sizes Through 500 kcmil Listed FT1 Size1/0 and Larger Listed for CT Use Black Sizes Listed Sunlight Resistant SIM Technology for Easier Pulling Applications Suitable for use as follows: Southwire SIMpull Type THHN or THWN-2* conductors are primarily used in conduit and cable trays for services, feeders, and branch circuits in commercial or industrial applications as specified in the National Electrical Code². When used as Type THHN, or T90 Nylon, conductor is suitable for use in dry locations at temperatures not to exceed 90 C. When used as Type THWN-2* or TWN75, conductor is suitable for use in wet or dry locations at temperatures not to exceed 90 C or not to exceed 75 C when exposed to oil or coolant. When used as Type MTW, conductor is suitable for use in wet locations or when exposed to oil or coolant at temperatures not to exceed 60 C or dry locations at temperatures not to exceed 90 C (with ampacity limited to that for 75 C conductor temperature per NFPA 79). Voltage for all applications is 600 volts. This cable may be installed without the need for pulling lubricant. Standards and References Southwire SIMpull Type THHN or THWN-2* or MTW (also AWM) meets or exceeds all applicable ASTM specifications, UL Standard 83, UL Standard 1063 (MTW), CSA, Federal Specification A-A-59544, and requirements of the National Electrical Code. Construction Southwire SIMpull Type THHN or THWN-2* or MTW copper conductors are annealed (soft) copper, compressed strand, insulated with a tough heat and moisture resistant polyvinyl chloride (PVC), over which a SIM (SLIKQwik Infused Membrane) nylon (polyamide) or UL-listed equal jacket is applied. Available in black, white, red, blue, green, yellow, brown, orange and gray. Some colors subject to economic order quantity. Conductor sizes 2 AWG and larger listed and marked sunlight resistant in black only. 1 Oil and gasoline resistant II as defined by Underwriters Laboratories Edition *rated -2 for 8 AWG and larger only Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

246 page 32 WEIGHTS, MEASUREMENTS AND PACKAGING CONDUCTOR SIZE (AWG or kcmil) INSULATION JACKET NOMINAL O.D. THICKNESS (mils) Number of THICKNESS Strands (mils) (mils) SOL. STR. APPROX. NET WEIGHT PER 1000 FT. (lbs) DNF DNF DQF F E C BC C B 1/ B 2/ B 3/ B 4/ B B B B B B C C C SOL. STR. ALLOWABLE AMPACITIES* 60 C 75 C 90 C STANDARD PACKAGE Solid construction available in sizes 14 through 10 AWG as Types THHN or THWN or AWM only. Sizes 14 through 6 AWG also suitable for 105 C appliance wiring material (AWM). Sizes 14 and 12 AWG contain four 500 ft. spools per carton. Size 10 AWG contains two 500 ft. spools per carton. *Allowable ampacities shown are for general use as specified by the National Electrical Code, 2008 Edition, section Unless the equipment is marked for use at higher temperatures, the conductor ampacity shall be limited to the following: 60 C When terminated to equipment for circuits rated 100 amperes or less or marked for size 14 through 1 AWG conductors. MTW wet locations or when exposed to oil or coolant. 75 C When terminated to equipment for circuits rated over 100 amperes or marked for conductors larger than size 1 AWG. THWN-2 when exposed to oil or coolant. MTW dry locations. 90 C THHN dry locations. THWN-2 wet or dry locations. For ampacity derating purposes. STANDARD PACKAGE CODES B 1000 ft. reel C 500 ft. reel D 2500 ft. spool E 1000 ft. spool F 500 ft. spool N 2000 ft. carton Q 350 ft. carton Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

247 page 33 XHHW 600 Volt. Copper Conductor Cross-Linked Polyethylene (XLP) Insulation High-Heat and Moisture Resistant Sizes 14 Through 8 AWG Also Rated SIS Black Sizes 2 AWG and Larger Sunlight Resistant Applications Suitable for use as follows: Southwire Type XHHW-2 conductors are primarily used in conduit or other recognized raceways for services, feeders and branch circuit wiring, as specified in the National Electrical Code. 1 XHHW-2 conductors may be used in wet or dry locations at temperatures not to exceed 90 C. Voltage rating for XHHW-2 conductors is 600 volts. Standards and References Southwire Type XHHW-2 conductors meet or exceed UL Standard 44, Federal Specification A-A-59544, and requirements of the National Electrical Code. Type XHHW-2 meets and exceeds all construction requirements of ICEA S (NEMA WC 70) Nonshielded 0-2 kv Cables, with testing frequencies based on UL requirements. Construction Southwire Type XHHW-2 copper conductors are annealed (soft) copper. Insulation is an abrasion, moisture, and heat resistant cross-linked polyethylene (XLP). Sizes 14, 12, and 10 AWG available in black, white, red, blue, yellow, green, orange, brown, purple, and gray. Conductor sizes 2 AWG and larger listed and marked sunlight resistant in black only. Colors available in sizes 8 AWG and larger. Not CT rated. Alternate Construction Southwire Type XHHW-2 copper conductors are also available in sizes 1/0 AWG and larger rated for cable tray use and sunlight resistant. Specify XHHW-2 for CT Use when requesting quote or ordering Edition Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

248 page 34 WEIGHTS, MEASUREMENTS AND PACKAGING SIZE/CONST. (AWG or kcmil) CONDUCTOR no. strands Insulation NOMINAL ALLOWABLE AMPACITIES* thickness O.D. (mils) (mils) 60 C 75 C 90 C APPROX. NET WEIGHT PER 1000 FT. (lbs) STANDARD PACKAGE A A A B B B B B 1/ B 2/ B 3/ B 4/ B B B B B B C C C C *Allowable Ampacities: Allowable ampacities shown are for general use as specified by the National Electrical Code, 2008 Edition, section Unless the equipment is marked for use at higher temperatures the conductor ampacities shall be limited to the following: 60 C When terminated to equipment for circuits rated 100 amperes or less or marked for 14 through 1 AWG conductors. 75 C When terminated to equipment for circuits rated over 100 amperes or marked for conductors larger than 1 AWG. 90 C Wet or dry locations. For ampacity derating purposes STANDARD PACKAGE CODES A 2500 ft. reel B 1000 ft. reel C 500 ft. spool Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

249 page 35 Annex D. Field Testing Safety Even low potential testing has inherent hazards to personnel and equipment. Thus safety rules are applicable for both high voltage and low voltage testing. Before conducting tests on any cable system, verify the cable system is properly de-energized. If the cable system has been previously energized, you must follow the prescribed rules for conducting the switching necessary to de-energize, lock-out, tag, and ground the cable system. Insulation Resistance Testing The most common method of field testing for 600 volt cable is to use a megohm meter. This test provides a measure of insulation resistance as a function of applied voltage and resulting leakage current. The insulation resistance is read in megohms. The test set reads the total circuit resistance and therefore it is useful to normalize the results using the following formula. IR = (L R F) / 1,000 where: L = the length of the conductor in feet R = the resistence in megohms read from the Megger F = the temperature correction factor from Table 10 This provides results in megohms for 1,000 feet of conductor which is useful when testing circuits of varying lengths. Interpretation of Results Industry practice recognizes tests with a dc potential of 500 or 1000 volts dc. The insulation resistance reading should be taken after 1 minute to allow the reading to stabilize. For spot short time readings, IR readings should be evaluated with respect to the test conditions to determine if the results should be considered acceptable. IR readings can vary greatly depending on the environmental conditions. Conditions such as humidity, moisture in the conduits, and leftover residue on the conductor from pulling compounds are among some of the factors that influence IR readings and make detection of problems more difficult. The following 2 to 50 Megohm Rule is a good indicator to use for evaluating IR readings: Acceptable: A megohm meter reading of 50 megohms or higher should be considered acceptable. Investigate: A megohm meter reading of 2 to 50 megohms may be used for deciding when to investigate the cable installation. In most cases, a 2 to 50 megohm reading does not indicate the insulation quality. Therefore, 2 to 50 megohms should not be specified as a pass/fail value. These readings are usually associated with long circuit lengths, moisture, or contamination. Ends of conductors that are dirty or damp may need to be cleaned and dried. Unacceptable: Readings less than 2 megohms will most likely indicate damaged insulation or severe test conditions. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

250 page 36 Table 10 Temperature Correction Factors for Insulation Resistance Calculations ºF 50º 55º 60º 65º 70º 75º 80º 85º TYPES XHHW/RHH/RHW/USE TYPE THHN Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

251 page 37 Annex E. Reference Materials NEC Table Minimum Size Equipment Grounding Conductors for Grounding Raceway and Equipment Rating or Setting of Automatic Overcurrent Device in Circuit Ahead of Equipment, Conduit, etc., Not Exceeding (Amperes) Copper Size (AWG or kcmil) Aluminum or Copper-Clad Aluminum* / / /0 3/ /0 4/ / / Note: Where necessary to comply with (A)(5) or (B)(4), the equipment grounding conductor shall be sized larger than given in this table. *See installation restrictions in Reprinted with permission from NFPA , the National Electrical Code Copyright 2007, National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA This reprinted material is not the official position of the NFPA on the referenced subject which is represented solely by the standard in its entirety. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

252 page 38 Article 358 Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) Trade Size 1/2 Nominal Internal Diameter Total Area 100% 60% 1 Wire 53% 2 Wires 31% Over 2 Wires 40% mm. in. mm. 2 in. 2 mm. 2 in. 2 mm. 2 in. 2 mm. 2 in. 2 mm. 2 in / / / / / Reprinted with permission from NFPA , the National Electrical Code Copyright 2007, National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA This reprinted material is not the official position of the NFPA on the referenced subject which is represented solely by the standard in its entirety. Article 344 Rigid Metal Conduit (RMT) Trade Size 3/8 Nominal Internal Diameter Total Area 100% 60% 1 Wire 53% 2 Wires 31% Over 2 Wires 40% mm. in. mm. 2 in. 2 mm. 2 in. 2 mm. 2 in. 2 mm. 2 in. 2 mm. 2 in / / / / / / Reprinted with permission from NFPA , the National Electrical Code Copyright 2007, National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA This reprinted material is not the official position of the NFPA on the referenced subject which is represented solely by the standard in its entirety. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

253 page 39 A r t i c l e s a n d R i g i d P V C C o n d u i t (RNC), Schedule 40, and HDPE Conduit Trade Size 3/8 Nominal Internal Diameter Total Area 100% 60% 1 Wire 53% 2 Wires 31% Over 2 Wires 40% mm. in. mm. 2 in. 2 mm. 2 in. 2 mm. 2 in. 2 mm. 2 in. 2 mm. 2 in / / / / / / Reprinted with permission from NFPA , the National Electrical Code Copyright 2007, National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA This reprinted material is not the official position of the NFPA on the referenced subject which is represented solely by the standard in its entirety. NEC T a b l e ( A ) S p a c i n g s f o r Conductor Supports SIZE of Wire 18 AWG 8 AWG Support of Conductors in Vertical Raceways Not greater than Aluminum or Copper-Clad Aluminum Conductors Copper m. ft. m. ft AWG 1/0 AWG Not greater than /0 AWG 4/0 AWG Not greater than > 4/0 AWG 350 kcmil Not greater than > 350 kcmil 500 kcmil Not greater than > 500 kcmil 750 kcmil Not greater than > 750 kcmil Not greater than Reprinted with permission from NFPA , the National Electrical Code Copyright 2007, National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA This reprinted material is not the official position of the NFPA on the referenced subject which is represented solely by the standard in its entirety. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

254 page 40 Table Allowable Ampacities of Insulated Conductors Rated 0 Through 2000 Volts, 60 C Through 90 C (140 F Through 194 F), Not More Than Three Current-Carrying Conductors in Raceway, Cable, or Earth (Directly Buried), Based on Ambient Temperature of 30 C (86 F) T e m p e r a t u r e R a t i n g o f C o n d u c t o r (See Table ) Size AWG or kcmil * 12* 10* /0 2/0 3/0 4/ Ambient Temps. ( C) C (140 F) 75 C (167 F) 90 C (194 F) 60 C (140 F) 75 C (167 F) 90 C (194 F) Types TW, UF Types RHW, THHW, THW, THWN, XHHW, USE, ZW COPPER Types TBS, SA, SIS, FEP, FEPB, MI, RHH, RHW-2, THHN, THHW, THW-2, THWN-2, USE- 2, XHH, XHHW, XHHW-2, ZW Types TW, UF Types RHW, THHW, THW, THWN, XHHW, USE Types TBS, SA, SIS, THHN, THHW, THW- 2, THWN-2, RHH, RHW-2, USE-2, XHH, XHHW, XHHW- 2, ZW-2 ALUMINUM OR COPPER-CLAD ALUMINUM CORRECTION FACTORS For ambient temperatures other than 30 C (86 F) multiply the allowable ampacities shown above by the appropriate factor shown below Size AWG or kcmil * 10* /0 2/0 3/0 4/ Ambient Temp. ( F) Reprinted with permission from NFPA , the National Electrical Code Copyright 2007, National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, MA This reprinted material is not the official position of the NFPA on the referenced subject which is represented solely by the standard in its entirety. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

255 page 41 NOTES: This publication is a collection of items of general information related to the subject of SIMpull THHN cable. It is not intended to be nor should it be used as authority for design, construction and use. The design, construction and use of SIMpull THHN cable should only be undertaken by competent professionals in light of currently accepted design and engineering practices. While great care has been employed to ensure that the applications, tables, standard and references and other information contained herein are free of errors, absolutely no warranties, either expressed or implied, are made as to the accuracy or completeness of any such tables and formulas contained herein. THOSE PREPARING AND/OR CONTRIBUTING TO THE PUBLICATION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED. THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMED BY SOUTHWIRE AND ALL OTHER PARTIES INVOLVED IN THE CREATION, PRODUCTION, OR DELIVERY OF THIS PUBLICATION. Neither Southwire nor anyone else who has been involved in the creation, production or delivery of this publication shall be liable for any direct, indirect, consequential, or incidental damages arising out of the use, the results of the use, or inability to use such publication, even if Southwire has been advised of the possibility of such damages or claim. Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation for consequential incidental damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you. Installation and Application Guide For 600v Conductors

256 Printed in the USA 2007 Armorlite is a trademark of Alflex Corporation. EZ-MC, SIMpull THHN and Southwire are registered trademarks of Southwire Company. MEGA MC XXL Connectors and AlumaFlex are trademarks of Southwire Company. Southwire Company, One Southwire Drive, Carrollton, GA National Electrical Code and NEC are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc., Quincy, MA Southwire Company. V5 10/17/07

257 1-1 CU-THHN THHN 600 Volts. Copper Conductor. Thermoplastic Insulation/Nylon Sheath. Heat, Moisture, Gasoline, and Oil Resistant 1. Sizes 8 AWG and Larger Rated THWN-2. All Stranded Sizes Rated MTW and THWN. Sizes 14 Through 6 AWG Rated AWM (105 C). Sizes 14 AWG through 500 kcmil Listed T90 Nylon or TWN 75. Sizes 14 AWG through 500 kcmil Listed FT1. Sizes 14 Through 1 AWG Rated VW-1. Size 1/0 AWG and Larger Listed for CT Use. Black Size 2 AWG and Larger Listed Sunlight Resistant. APPLICATIONS Southwire Type THHN or THWN-2* conductors are primarily used in conduit and cable trays for services, feeders, and branch circuits in commercial or industrial applications as specified in the National Electrical Code 2. When used as Type THHN, or T90 Nylon conductor is suitable for use in dry locations at temperatures not to exceed 90 C. When used as Type THWN-2* or TWN75, conductor is suitable for use in wet or dry locations at temperatures not to exceed 90 C or not to exceed 75 C when exposed to oil or coolant. When used as Type MTW, conductor is suitable for use in wet locations or when exposed to oil or coolant at temperatures not to exceed 60 C or dry locations at temperatures not to exceed 90 C (with ampacity limited to that for 75 C conductor temperature per NFPA 79). Conductor temperatures not to exceed 105 C in dry locations when rated AWM and used as appliance wiring material or when used ast90 Nylon. Voltage for all applications is 600 volts. SPECIFICATIONS Southwire Type THHN or THWN-2* or MTW (also AWM) meets or exceeds all applicable ASTM specifications, UL Standard 83, UL Standard 1063 (MTW), CSA, Federal Specification A-A-59544, and requirements of the National Electrical Code. CONSTRUCTION Southwire Type THHN or THWN-2* or MTW copper conductors are annealed (soft) copper, compressed strand, insulated with a tough heat and moisture resistant polyvinyl chloride (PVC), over which a nylon (polyamide) or UL-listed equal jacket is applied. Available in black, white, red, blue, green, yellow, brown, orange, and gray. Some colors standard, some subject to economic order quantity. Conductor sizes 2 AWG and larger listed and marked sunlight resistant in black only 1 Oil and gasoline resistant II as defined by Underwriters Laboratories Edition. *rated -2 for 8 AWG and larger only. Sat May 06 16:30:00 EDT 2006 Page 1 of 2

258 CU-THHN Conductor Insulation Thickness (mils) Jacket Thickness (mils) Nominal O.D. (mils) Approx. Net Weight Per 1000 ft. (lbs.) Allowable Ampacities+ Standard Package Size (AWG or kcmil) Num. Strands Sol. Str. Sol. Str. 60 C 75 C 90 C DNF DNF DQF F E C BC C B 1/ B 2/ B 3/ B 4/ B B B B B B C C C Solid construction available in sizes 14 through 10 AWG as Types THHN or THWN or AWM only. Sizes 14 through 6 AWG also suitable for 105 C appliance wiring material (AWM). Sizes 14 and 12 AWG contain four 500 ft. spools per carton. Size 10 AWG contains two 500 ft. spools per carton. +Allowable ampacities shown are for general use as specified by the National Electrical Code, 2002 Edition, section unless the equipment is marked for use at higher temperatures the conductor ampacity shall be limited to the following. 60 C - When terminated to equipment for circuits rated 100 amperes or less or marked for size 14 through 1 AWG conductors. MTW wet locations or when exposed to oil or coolant. 75 C - When terminated to equipment for circuits rated over 100 amperes or marked for conductors larger than size 1 AWG. THWN-2 when exposed to oil or coolant. MTW dry locations. 90 C - THHN dry locations. THWN-2 wet or dry locations. For ampacity derating purposes. STANDARD PACKAGE CODES: B ft. reel C ft. reel D ft. spool E ft. spool F ft. spool N ft. carton Q ft. carton RECOMMENDED SAMPLE SPECIFICATIONS: (MTW or THHN or THWN-2) Conductors shall be UL-listed Type MTW or THHN or THWN-2* gasoline and oil resistant II, suitable for operations at 600 volts as specified in the National Electrical Code. Sizes 14 through 1 AWG shall be rated VW-1, larger sizes shall be listed for CT use. Sizes 2 AWG and larger listed and marked sunlight resistant in black only. Conductors shall be annealed copper, insulated with high-heat and moisture resistant PVC, jacketed with abrasion, moisture, gasoline, and oil resistant nylon or listed equivalent, as manufactured by Southwire Company or approved equal. (AWM) Conductors shall be UL-listed Type THHN or THWN-2* or MTW or AWM, suitable for operation at 600 volts at conductor temperatures not to exceed 105 C. *rated -2 for 8 AWG and larger only. Sat May 06 16:30:00 EDT 2006 Page 2 of 2

259 TYPE TC CONTROL CABLE THHN 1 Annealed Copper Conductors Heat, Moisture and Sunlight- Resistant APPLICATIONS Suitable for use as follows: Southwire s Type TC Control Cable is for use in industrial power or control circuits where small diameter, flame retardant cables are desired Primary installations include cable trays, raceways, and outdoor locations where supported by a messenger wire Type TC is also listed for direct burial and for use in Class 1, Division 2 hazardous locations and Class 1 control circuits Conductors may be used at temperatures not to exceed 75 C in wet locations or 90 C in dry locations STANDARDS & REFERENCES Type TC Control Cable 600 Volt Copper Conductors PVC/Nylon Insulated Singles Sizes 16 AWG through 10 AWG Overall PVC Jacket Heat, Moisture and Sunlight-Resistant Southwire s Type TC Control Cable meets or exceeds the applicable requirements of the following standards and specifications: ASTM - (All applicable standards) UL Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables UL Electrical Wires, Cables and Flexible Cords ICEA S Control Cable Conductor Identification. (Method 1, Table 2 - colored compounds with tracer colors excluding white and green) UL UL Flame Exposure Test (70,000 BTU/hr) ICEA T Vertical Cable Tray Flame Test (70,000 BTU/hr) ICEA T Vertical Cable Tray Flame Test (210,000 BTU/hr) IEEE Flame Testing of Cables for Use in Cable Tray in Industrial and Commercial Occupancies (70,000 BTU/hr) CONSTRUCTION Southwire s Type TC Control Cable is available in sizes 16 AWG through 10 AWG, with multiconductor constructions of 2 through 37 conductors. The product uses Type THHN or THWN conductors in sizes 14 AWG through 10 AWG. Individual conductors are bare annealed copper covered with a polyvinyl chloride (PVC) insulation over which a nylon (polyamide) or UL listed equal jacket is applied. The overall jacket consists of a heat, moisture and sunlight-resistant PVC. Non-halogen jacket is available upon request. 1 Southwire offers three and four conductor cables in sizes 14, 12, 10 AWG with a green insulated ground wire using ICEA color code Method 1, Table 2

260 MULTI CONDUCTORS WEIGHTS, MEASUREMENTS AND PACKAGING Number of Jacket Thickness AVERAGE Overall Diameter Approximate Weight Conductors (inches) inches mm lbs/1000 ft kg/km 16 AWG (26 strands) Type TC-TFFN* Conductors AWG (7 strands) Type TC-THHN OR THWN Conductors AWG (7 strands) Type TC-THHN or thwn Conductors AWG (7 strands) Type TC-THHN or THWN Conductors * Similar to Type TFFN except rated 75 C in wet locations or 90 C in dry locations. TYPE TC CONTROL CABLE THHN

261 Select-a-Lubricant Commercial Wire Pulling Utility Cable Pulling Lubricants Finished Construction Indoors or Outdoors New Construction Indoors or Outdoors New Construction Indoors or Outdoors Indoors or Outdoors Outdoors ONLY Outdoors Indoors or Outdoors 40 F F 4 C - 49 C 40 F F 4 C - 49 C 40 F F 4 C - 49 C 40 F F 4 C - 49 C -28 F - 40 F -33 C - 4 C 40 F F 4 C - 38 C 40 F F 4 C - 82 C Up to 75 ft. Up to 8 hrs. Up to 1,200 ft. Up to 24 hrs. Up to 1,200 ft. Up to 24 hrs. Up to 250 ft. Up to 24 hrs. Up to 250 ft. Up to 72 hrs. Up to 250 ft. Up to 24 hrs. Up to 250 ft. Up to 24 hrs. ClearGlide Yellow 77 Yellow 77 Plus Aqua-Gel II Aqua-Gel CW Aqua-Gel IIP Velocity Wire Pulling Lubricant Selection Guide ClearGlide Yellow 77 Yellow 77 Plus Aqua-Gel ll Aqua-Gel CW Aqua-Gel IIP Velocity Wire Pulling Wire Pulling Wire Pulling Cable Pulling Cable Pulling Cable Pulling Wire Pulling Lubricant Lubricant Lubricant Lubricant Lubricant Lubricant Lubricant Color Clear Yellow Yellow Blue Pink Blue Cream Base Polymer Wax Wax Polymer Polymer Polymer Polymer Average Coefficient of Friction* Safe Storage 32 F 180 F 32 F 130 F 32 F 190 F 32 F 180 F -28 F 190 F 32 F 180 F 40 F 140 F Temperature Range (0 C 82 C) (0 C 54 C) (0 C 88 C) (0 C 82 C) (-33 C 82 C) (0 C 82 C) (4 C 82 C) Application Temperature Range COMPATIBILITY (Cable Types): 40 F 100 F 40 F 100 F 40 F 100 F 40 F 100 F -28 F 40 F 40 F 100 F 25 F 140 F (4 C 38 C) (4 C 38 C) (4 C 38 C) (4 C 38 C) (-33 C 4 C) (4 C 38 C) (-3.9 C 60 C) Rubber Neoprene Nylon PVC High-density or cross-linked polyethylene Low-density polyethylene Semiconducting jacket Hypalon *Results from Falex Corporation, an independent testing agency specializing in tribology tests, using the Falex-ISC On Disk Tribmeter System machine with the ASTM G99 modified method. B for Customer Service

262 Wire Installation Yellow 77 Plus Wire Pulling Lubricant Rapid Glide polytetrafluoroethylene additive provides greater lubricity than other wax-based lubricants great for tough pulls Safe to use with all cable types Clings to cable throughout long runs, even where moisture is present Remains stable in high temperatures usable from 30 F to 190 F (-1 C to 88 C) Dries slowly to a thin, non-conductive film that won t harden in conduit Easy to apply by hand or by brush Creamy texture applies easily and uniformly Homogeneous blend requires no mixing Won't dry out surface coat forms to control evaporation Environmentally safe non-toxic, non-flammable and non-corrosive Lubricants Description Cat. No. 1-qt. Squeeze bottle gal. Bucket gal. Bucket gal. Bucket 36 Buckets/Pallet BP Yellow 77 Wire Pulling Lubricant LISTED The #1 brand of wire pulling lubricant since 1959 the perfect general purpose lube Wax-based formula provides superior lubricity Safe to use with most cable types except low-density polyethylene and semi-conducting jackets Clings to cable throughout long pulls, even where moisture is present Won t break down or separate after repeated exposure to freezing temperatures Dries to a thin, non-conductive film Easy to apply by hand or by brush Creamy texture applies easily and uniformly Homogeneous blend requires no mixing Won t dry out surface coat forms to control evaporation Environmentally safe non-toxic, non-flammable and non-corrosive Description Cat. No. 1-qt. Squeeze bottle gal. Bucket gal. Bucket gal. Drum gal. Bucket 36 Buckets/Pallet BP LISTED for Customer Service B-9

263 ClearGlide Wire Pulling Lubricant Lubricants Clear and colorless for quick and easy clean-up great for indoor and retrofit pulls Exceptional lubricity for super-fast pulls Polymer-based formula is perfect for all electrical and datacomm applications Safe to use with all cable types Controlled evaporation rate is ideal for shorter runs Remains stable over wide temperature range usable from 30 F to 180 F (-1 C to 82 C) Dries to a semi-fluid film that won't clog conduit Easy to apply by hand, brush or pump Environmentally safe non-toxic, non-flammable and non-corrosive Description Cat. No. 1-qt. Squeeze bottle gal. Bucket gal. Bucket gal. Bucket 36 Buckets/Pallet BP 55-gal. Drum Velocity Wire Pulling Lubricant LISTED High cling factor Maximum friction reduction Specification grade Compatible with all popular cable types Temperature stable UL listed Non-combustible residue Environmentally safe -- non-toxic, non-flammable and non-corrosive Description Cat. No. 1-qt. Squeeze bottle gal. Bucket gal. Bucket gal. Bucket 36 Buckets/pallet BP 55-gal. Drum qt. Bag (12 bags/bucket) /2-gal. Bag (6 bags/bucket) Recommended Qty. of Lubricant Formula Q =.0015 x L x D Q = Quantity of recommended lube in gallons L = Length of pull in feet D = Nominal ID of conduit in inches The formula listed above is used as a guideline on estimating the quantity of lube needed for various jobs. Many factors go into a cable pull, however this formula is just based on length of the pull and diameter of the conduit. Increase quantities for the following troubles: Stiff, heavy cable Pulls with several bends Rough, old or dirty conduits High temperatures High percent conduit fill LISTED Selection & Application Guides Description Cat. No. Lubricant Selection Slide Rule P-2710 Web Based Selection & Application Guide: B for Customer Service

264 Wire Installation Aqua-Gel IIP Cable Pulling Lubricant Features the same excellent qualities as Aqua-Gel II Cable Pulling Lubricant with a lower viscosity for easy pouring and pumping Pourable formula clings to cable eliminates hand application for a cleaner and safer job Compatible with all cable types Cleans up easily with soap and water Environmentally safe non-toxic, non-flammable and non-corrosive Description Cat. No. 1-gal. Jug gal. Bucket gal. Drum Aqua-Gel CW Cable Pulling Lubricant LISTED Lubricants Features the same excellent qualities as Aqua-Gel II Cable Pulling Lubricant with a lower temperature range for use outdoors in cold weather Polymer-based, cold-weather formula remains stable in storage from -28 F to 190 F (-33 C to 82 C) Formulated for exterior use in cold weather conditions Cleans up easily with soap and water Clings to cable throughout long pulls Well-suited for hand or poured applications Environmentally safe non-toxic, non-flammable and non-corrosive Description Cat. No. 1-qt. Squeeze bottle gal. Jug gal. Bucket gal. Drum Aqua-Gel II Cable Pulling Lubricant Polymer-based formula provides maximum tension reduction in high-stress electrical and communications cable-pulling operations Compatible with all cable types except composite rubber Cleans up easily with soap and water Clings to cable throughout long pulls Remains stable over wide temperature range usable from 28 F to 180 F (-2 C to 88 C) Dries to a semi-fluid film that won t clog conduit Easy to apply by hand, brush or pump Environmentally safe non-toxic, non-flammable and non-corrosive For outdoor use only Description Cat. No. 1-qt. Squeeze bottle gal. Bucket qt. Bag (12 bags per bucket) /2-gal. Bag (6 bags per bucket) gal. Bucket gal. Bucket 36 Buckets/Pallet BP 55-gal. Drum for Customer Service B-11 LISTED

265 Duct Seal Noalox Anti-Oxidant Accessories Seals around junction boxes, flashings and service entrances Permanently soft, non-toxic compound can be painted immediately after application Won t adversely affect other plastic materials or corrode metals Description Cat. No. 1 lb. Block (10/carton) lb. Block (10/carton) Bender Putter Steel shaft with rubber grip and conduit bender-shaped head Includes velour pouch to protect head Description Cat. No. Bender Putter IDEAL Wipes The Multi-Purpose Towel Pre-moistened wipes require no water Cleans dirt, grease, lube and grime Durable fabric scrubs without tearing Infused with natural hand moisturizers and Vitamin E Orange citrus scent Description Qty. Cat. No. IDEAL Wipes, 12 in. x 9 in. 82/can LISTED Anti-oxidant and anti-seizing compound improves efficiency and service life of aluminumto-aluminum and aluminum-to-copper electrical connections Suspended zinc particles penetrate and cut aluminum oxide Provides additional interstrand and inter-conductor current paths for improved conductivity and cooler connections Carrier material excludes air to prevent further oxidation For use with all types of pressure-type wire connectors including screw-on, tap, service entrance and split-bolt Reduces galling and seizing and promotes good ground continuity on aluminum conduit joints Description Cat. No. 1/2-oz. Tube oz. Squeeze bottle oz. Squeeze bottle oz. Brush cap gal. Bucket gal. Bucket Twist-a-Nut Conduit Deburring Tool Deburrs inside and outside edges of 1/2 in., 3/4 in. and 1 in. thin wall conduit Hooded tip tightens EMT fitting set screws without slipping Square tip seats much more quickly on fitting screws than slotted version Head removes and is interchangeable with IDEAL 7-in-1 Twist-a-Nut Screwdriver shaft (#35-908) Head can be used in drill or cordless screwdriver Universal Wire-Nut Wire Connector wrench in handle end eases installation of twist-on connectors Lifetime guarantee (excludes blades) LISTED Description Cat. No. Conduit Deburring Tool, slotted tip Conduit Deburring Tool - head only, slotted tip Conduit Deburring Tool, square tip Conduit Deburring Tool - head only, #2 square tip Replacement Blades (2/pack) B for Customer Service

266 Hickeys Heavy-Duty Hacksaw Hickeys/Hacksaws Exceptional, durable, heat treated materials for extra strength Reinforced at stress points for longer life Grooved internal hook surface helps prevent conduit from slipping Ductile Iron Hickeys High-strength ductile iron construction Grooved internal hook helps prevent conduit from slipping Lifetime replacement guarantee Conduit Type and Size Hickey Only Cat. No. 1/2 in. EMT /4 in. EMT, 1/2 in. Rigid & 1/2 in. IMC in. EMT, 3/4 in. Rigid & 3/4 in. IMC /4 in. EMT, 1 in. Rigid & 1 in. IMC Use as conventional hacksaw or as jab saw to enlarge holes Rugged frame provides lightweight rigidity and exceptional control Stores up to nine extra blades Blades can be adjusted to 55 angle for flush cutting and tensioned to 25,000 psi Includes 12 in. x 24T bi-metal blade Description Cat. No. Heavy Duty Hacksaw Ergonomic Hacksaw Handles for Hickeys Rugged, steel construction for long-term durability Baked-on blue enamel finish resists corrosion and enhances visibility Convenient bending guide for offset bends Conduit Type and Size Pocket Bender Guide Convenient pocket-sized reference guide Includes simple, concise bending techniques for precision stubs, back-to-back, offset and saddle bends Request free booklet #P-100 Handle Only Cat. No. 1/2 in. EMT /4 in. EMT, 1/2 in. Rigid & 1/2 in. IMC in. EMT, 3/4 in. Rigid & 3/4 in. IMC /4 in. EMT, 1 in. Rigid & 1 in. IMC Angled handle for easier cutting Blade can easily be adjusted for flush cutting Easy tensioning wing-nut keeps blades tight for straighter cuts Cushioned ergonomic grip for performance and comfort Includes 12 in. x 24T bi-metal blade Description Cat. No. Ergonomic Hacksaw Hacksaw Blades Bi-metal blades provide strength, flexibility and longer life Description Qty./Pack Cat. No. 12 in. x 18T Blades in. x 24T Blades in. x 32T Blades in. x 18T Blades in. x 24T Blades in. x 32T Blades B for Customer Service

267 Wire Installation Valu-Line Pull-Line White with gray tracer for easy identification Continuous-fiber polyline great for blowing directly into conduit Will not rot or mildew Can be left in conduit for future use Powr-Fish Pull-Line Standard Duty Description Tensile Strength Cat. No. Valu-Line Pull-Line 6,500 ft. (bucket) 190 lbs Conduit Measuring Tape Provides quick and accurate measurement of conduit runs Easy-to-read markings in sequential one-foot increments 160 lb. tensile strength Pulls rope through raceways without stretching Dispenser features built-in cutter, handle, non-skid base and adjustable reel tension Will not rot or mildew Description Cat. No. Conduit Measuring Tape 3,000 ft Pulling Supplies White with blue tracer for easy identification Continuous-fiber polyline great for blowing directly into conduit Will not rot or mildew Can be left in conduit for future use Description Tensile Strength Cat. No. Powr-Fish Pull-Line 6,500 ft. (bucket) 210 lbs Powr-Fish Pull-Line 6,500 ft. (box) 210 lbs Powr-Fish Pull-Line 6,500 ft. (36 bukets/pallet) 210 lbs BP Powr-Fish Pull-Line White with red tracer for easy identification 500 lb. tensile, our highest tensile-rated pull-line Continuous-fiber polyline great for blowing directly into conduit Will not rot or mildew Can be left in conduit for future use Heavy Duty Extra- Heavy Duty 500# Description Tensile Strength Cat. No. Powr-Fish Pull-Line 2,200 ft. (bucket) 500 lbs Pro-Pull Rope Low-friction polypropylene rope slides easily through conduit Non-sliver surface can be handled without gloves Will not rot or mildew Rugged, lightweight construction Tensile Rope Size Strength Cat. No. 1/4 in. x 250 ft. Reel 1,125 lbs /4 in. x 600 ft. Reel 1,125 lbs /4 in. x 1,000 ft. Reel 1,125 Ibs /8 in. x 250 ft. Reel 2,430 lbs /8 in. x 600 ft. Reel 2,430 lbs /8 in. x 1,200 ft. Reel 2,430 lbs /2 in. x 250 ft. Reel 3,780 lbs /2 in. x 600 ft. Reel 3,780 lbs /2 in. x 1,200 ft. Reel 3,780 Ibs /8 in. x 600 ft. Reel 5,580 Ibs /8 in. x 1,200 ft. Reel 5,580 Ibs /4 in. x 300 ft. Reel 7,650 lbs /4 in. x 600 ft. Reel 7,650 lbs /4 in. x 1,200 ft. Reel 7,650 lbs Eye splice on working end for Customer Service B-15

268 Foam Carriers Line Packages Pulling Supplies Attach to a suitable line to serve as a piston clears out water or debris as they travel through conduit Durable foam construction for repeated use and long life For use with any type of blower or vacuum system One-piece pull line and foam tip unwind as they move through conduit One-piece construction for faster, easier use with no knots or foam carriers to retrieve Line tensile strength of 17 lbs. For use with any type of blower or vacuum system Foam Carriers Description Cat. No. 1/2 in. Foam Carrier, 5-pack bag /4 in. Foam Carrier, 5-pack bag in. Foam Carrier, 5-pack bag /4 in. Foam Carrier, 3-pack bag /2 in. Foam Carrier, 2-pack bag in. Foam Carrier, 1-pack bag /2 in. Foam Carrier, 1-pack bag in. Foam Carrier, 1-pack bag /2 in. Foam Carrier, 1-pack bag in. Foam Carrier, 1-pack bag in. Foam Carrier, 1-pack bag in. Foam Carrier, 1-pack bag Line Packages Description Color Cat. No. Line Package, 1/2 in. x 75 ft., 10-pack bag Red Line Package, 1/2 in. x 150 ft., 10-pack bag Red Line Package, 3/4 in. x 200 ft., 5-pack bag Yellow Line Package, 3/4 in. x 300 ft., 5-pack bag Yellow Line Package, 3/4 in. x 450 ft., 5-pack bag Yellow Line Package, 1 in. x 200 ft., 5-pack bag White Line Package, 1 in. x 300 ft., 5-pack bag White Line Package, 1 in. x 450 ft., 5-pack bag White B for Customer Service